Volume 2 - Installation and Configuration Release 1.4 Rev A

Turin Networks Inc.
Traverse System
SONET Documentation
Volume 2
Installation and Configuration
Release 1.4
Publication Date: December 2003
Document Number: 800-0102-04 Rev. A
FCC Compliance
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the installation instructions may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Canadian Compliance
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment
Regulations. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respects toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le
matériel brouilleur du Canada.
International Declaration of Conformity
We, Turin Networks, Inc. declare under our sole responsibility that the Traverse platform (models: Traverse
2000, Traverse 1600, and Traverse 600) to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following
standards:
EMC Standards
EN55022 EN55024 CISPR-22
Safety Standards
EN60950 CSA 22.2 No. 60950, ASINZS 3260
IEC 60950 Third Edition. Compliant with all CB scheme member country deviations.
Following the provisions of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC of the Council of the European Union.
Copyright © 2003 Turin Networks, Inc.
All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary and confidential information of Turin Networks,
Inc., and may not be used, reproduced, or distributed except as authorized by Turin Networks. No part of this
publication may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative work (such as
translation, transformation or adaptation) without written permission from Turin Networks Inc.
Turin Networks Trademarks
Turin Networks, the Turin Networks logo, Traverse, Traverse 2000, Traverse 1600, Traverse 600,
TransAccess 100, TransNav, and Creating The Broadband Edge are trademarks of Turin Networks, Inc. or
its affiliates in the United States and other countries. All other trademarks, service marks, product names, or
brand names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective owners.
Government Use
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212
(Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and
Computer Software), as applicable.
V OLUME 2 I NSTALLATION AND C ONFIGURATION
Contents
Volume 2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Section 1 Basic Precautions and Procedures

Chapter 1
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Chapter 3
Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Chapter 4
Inserting and Removing Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Section 2 Hardware Installation

Chapter 1
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Chapter 2
Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air Ramp. . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Chapter 3
Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Chapter 4
Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Chapter 5
Fan Module and Air Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Section 3 Network Interface Cabling

Chapter 1
Electrical Connector Module Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Chapter 2
DS1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Chapter 3
DS3 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Chapter 4
10/100BaseTX Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
Chapter 5
Fiber Optic Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
Section 4 Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling

Chapter 1
Traverse System Alarm Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chapter 2
Traverse System Timing Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Chapter 3
Traverse System DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page i

Volume 2 Installation and Configuration
Section 5 Power Cabling

Chapter 1
Battery and Battery Return Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Chapter 2
Battery and Battery Return Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Section 6 Start-up and Module Placement

Chapter 1
Start-up and Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Chapter 2
Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Section 7 Appendices
Appendix A
Module Placement Planning and Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Appendix B
Installation and Configuration Checklists. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Appendix C
TransAccess 100 Mux Network Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Appendix D
GCM Ethernet and RS-232 Pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Page ii Turin Networks Release 1.4

Volume 2 Description
Introduction This description contains the following documentation topics:

■ What’s New?, page iii.
■ Documentation Set Description, page iv.
■ Information Mapping, page v.
■ If You Need Help, page v.
■ Calling for Repairs, page v.
What’s New? Volume 2, Installation and Configuration includes the following enhancements with
respect to the new Release 1.4 feature set.
Release Feature Volume Reference
1:2 equipment protection and/or Section 3—Network Interface Cabling:

3-slot DS3 Electrical ■ Chapter 1—“Electrical Connector Module Descriptions,” page 3-1.
Connector Modules (ECMs). ■ Chapter 2—“DS1 Cabling,” page 3-5.
■ Chapter 3—“DS3 Cabling,” page 3-19.
12-port DS3/EC-1/E3 module, ■ Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement

24-port DS3/EC-1/E3 module. Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1.
2-port GbE SX plus 16-port ■ Section 3—Network Interface Cabling, Chapter 5—“Fiber Optic
10/100BaseTX module. Cabling,” page 3-51.
■ Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement
Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1.
4-port OC-12 LR2 module. Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning
and Guidelines,” page 7-1.
Front inlet fan tray (FIFT). ■ Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
1—“Precautions,” ESD Jack Locations, page 1-5.
■ Section 2—Hardware Installation, Chapter 2—“Traverse Shelf,
Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air Ramp,” page 2-7 and
Chapter 3—“Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation,”
page 2-17.
■ Section 6—Start-up and Module Placement, Chapter 1—“Start-up
and Initial Configuration,” Front Inlet Fan Module and LED
Indicators, page 6-17.
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page iii

Documentation Set Description
Documentation The Traverse™ system documentation set is comprised of five volumes and is written
Set Description to meet users’ needs as described in the table below.
The documentation set meets Telcordia™ Generic Requirements for Supplier-Provided
Documentation GR–454 requirements.
Volume Description Target Audience
Volume 1, This volume provides a detailed overview of the Anyone with the need
General Traverse system. It also includes engineering and to understand the
Information planning information. Traverse system and
its applications.
Volume 2, This volume provides required equipment and Installers, Field and
Installation tools, and step-by-step procedures for: Network Engineers.
and ■ Hardware installation.
Configuration ■ Power cabling.
■ Network cabling.
■ Power-up.
■ Configuration.
Volume 3, This volume provides provisioning concepts Network Engineers,
Provisioning related to the Traverse system. Step-by-step Provisioning and
procedures for provisioning using the TransNav Network Operations
Management System are provided. Center (NOC)
personnel.
Volume 4, This volume provides required equipment and Field and Network
Maintenance tools, and step-by-step procedures for: Engineers.
and Testing ■ Routine maintenance.
■ Module replacement.
■ Alarms and recommended actions.
■ Troubleshooting.
■ Performance monitoring.
■ Loopback tests.
■ Traverse system software upgrade.
Volume 5, This volume provides an overview of the Field and Network
TransNav TransNav™ Management System. It also includes: Engineers,
Management ■ Hardware requirements and third party Provisioning, and
System software requirements. Network Operations
■ Installation instructions for client/server, third Center (NOC)
party, and management system software. personnel.
■ Complete descriptions of management system
menus and windows along with reporting,
provisioning, fault management, performance
management, and system administration
functions.
■ Command Line Interface user’s guide.
Page iv Turin Networks Release 1.4

Information Mapping
Information Traverse system documentation uses Information Mapping format. Information

Mapping Mapping presents information in small units or blocks. The beginning of an
information block is identified by a subject label in the left margin. The end of an
information block is identified by a horizontal line. Subject labels allow the reader to
scan the document and find a specific subject. Its objective is to make information easy
for the reader to access, use and remember.
Each procedure lists the equipment and tools, and provides step-by-step instructions
required to perform each task. Graphics are integrated into the procedures whenever
possible.
If You Need If you need assistance while working with Traverse products, contact the Turin
Help Networks Technical Assistance Center (TAC):
■ Inside the U.S.: 1-866-TURINET (866-887-4638)
■ Outside the U.S.: 707-665-4400
■ Online: www.turinnetworks.com/technical.htm
TAC is available 6:00AM to 6:00PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday (business
hours). When the TAC is closed, emergency service only is available on a call-back
basis. E-mail support (24-hour response) is also available through at:
support@turinnetworks.com.
Calling for If repair is necessary, call the Turin Repair Facility at 1-866-TURINET (866-887-4638)
Repairs for a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number before sending the unit.The RMA
number must be prominently displayed on all equipment cartons. The Repair Facility is
open from 6:00AM to 6:00PM Pacific Time, Monday through Friday.
When calling outside the United States, use the appropriate international access code,
and then call 707-665-4400 to contact the Repair Facility.
When shipping equipment for repair, follow these steps:
1. Pack the unit securely.
2. Enclose a note describing the exact problem.
3. Enclose a copy of the invoice that verifies the warranty status.
4. Ship the unit PREPAID to the following address:
Turin Networks, Inc.
Turin Repair Facility
Attn: RMA # ________
1415 North McDowell Blvd.
Petaluma, CA 94954 USA
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page v

Page vi Turin Networks Release 1.4
S ECTION 1 B ASIC P RECAUTIONS AND P ROCEDURES
Contents
Chapter 1
Precautions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Environmental Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Hardware Installation Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Electrical Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Fiber Optic Cabling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Module Placement Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Electrostatic Discharge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
ESD Jack Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Required Equipment and Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Main Backplane Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Remove and Replace Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Remove PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Replace PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Chapter 3
Cable Routing
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Traverse Cable Ports–Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Copper and Coax Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Fiber Optic Cable Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Chapter 4
Inserting and Removing Modules
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Insert Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Remove Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page vii

Volume 2 Section 1 Basic Precautions and Procedures
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Front Inlet Fan Module ESD Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-2 Air Ramp with ESD Jack Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Figure 1-3 Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Main Backplane Covers . . . . . 1-8
Figure 1-4 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover with Fasteners . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Figure 1-5 Traverse Main Backplane and PDAP-2S Cable Routing—
Left Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Figure 1-6 Traverse Shelf with Electrical Connector Modules and
Cable Management Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Figure 1-7 Fiber Cable Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Figure 1-8 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Figure 1-9 MPX Connector on Optical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Figure 1-10 Module Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Figure 1-11 Traverse Shelf with Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Figure 1-12 Module Tabs in the Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Figure 1-13 Module Tabs in the Unlocked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Remove and Replace Traverse Fiber Optic
Management Tray Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Table 1-2 Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 1-3 Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Table 1-4 Clean MPX Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Table 1-5 Insert a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Table 1-6 Remove a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Page viii Turin Networks Release 1.4

SECTION 1 B ASIC PRECAUTIONS AND P ROCEDURES
Chapter 1
Precautions
Introduction This chapter is intended to provide the necessary environmental, hardware installation,
electrical and fiber optic/laser cabling, and module handling precautions. Follow these
precautions to ensure personal safety and to avoid any equipment damage during
installation, configuration or maintenance procedures.
Three types of warnings and precaution statements are used in the documentation.
WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not

followed; for example, this warning applies to electrical hazards.
WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not followed;

for example, this warning applies to optical hazards.
Important: May cause equipment damage if the precaution is not

followed; for example, this note applies to electrostatic damage to
equipment.
Environmental
Precautions Important: Traverse systems are designed to comply with
GR-1089-CORE and GR-63-CORE. Install and operate the Traverse
system in environments that do not expose wiring, cabling, or connectors
to the outside plant. Acceptable applications include Central Office
Environments (COEs), Electronic Equipment Enclosures (EEEs),
Controlled Environment Vaults (CEVs), huts, and customer premises
environment.
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-1

Volume 2, Section 1: Basic Precautions and Procedures
Hardware Installation Precautions
Hardware
Installation Important: Always use thread-forming screws when installing a
Precautions Traverse shelf to ensure electrical continuity. This is especially critical
when installing equipment in a rack coated with a non-conductive coating.
Important: To ensure proper air flow, 3/8-inch of space is required

between the Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) and the first
Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf.
Important: A fan tray holder, with fay tray module and fan filter, must
be installed directly below the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf so
that there is no gap between the shelf and fan tray holder to ensure proper
air flow.
Electrical
Precautions WARNING! Do not connect central office battery and battery return
supply cables at the central office source until all cabling at the Power
Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) and Traverse shelf backplane
is complete. Ensure that PDAP circuit breakers are in the OFF
position before connecting battery and battery return supply cables to
the central office source.
WARNING! The protective back covers are removed from the PDAP
during cabling activities. PDAP back covers must be replaced after
cabling is complete and before –48 VDC power supply cables are
connected to the central office source. The PDAP protective back
covers must remain in place during normal operation to protect
against possible electric shock.
Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD) wrist strap when connecting copper cables to the Power
Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP), main backplane, and fan tray
holder. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the
Traverse front inlet fan module, standalone air ramp, or other confirmed
source of earth ground. Refer to ESD Jack Locations, page 1-5.
Page 1-2 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Chapter 1 Precautions
Fiber Optic Cabling Precautions
Fiber Optic
Cabling WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a
Precautions class IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment
with fiber attached. Do not look into the optical connector of the
transmitter with power applied. Laser output is invisible, and eye
damage can result. Do not defeat safety features that prevent looking
into the optical connector.
WARNING! The optical connector system used on the Traverse fiber

optic backplane is designed with a mechanical shutter mechanism that
blocks physical and visual access to the optical connector. Do not
defeat this safety feature designed to prevent eye damage.
WARNING! Follow all warning labels when working with optical

fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with optical fibers.
Never look directly into the end of a terminated or unterminated fiber
or connector as it may cause eye damage.
Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

twist or cross one cable over another.
Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

bend optical fibers in a radius less than 1½-inches.
Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD) wrist strap when connecting optical cables to the fiber optic
backplane. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the
Traverse front inlet fan module, standalone air ramp, or other confirmed
source of earth ground. Refer to ESD Jack Locations, page 1-5.

Module Placement Precautions
Module
Placement Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge
Precautions (ESD) wrist strap when handling Traverse modules. Plug the ESD wrist
strap into the ESD jack provided on the Traverse front inlet fan module,
standalone air ramp, or other confirmed source of earth ground. Refer to
ESD Jack Locations, page 1-5.
‘
Important: Do not install Traverse modules (cards) until all installation

and cabling procedures are complete.
Important: Handle modules by the edges and faceplate only. Do not

touch any module connectors or components.
Important: Observe all electrostatic sensitive device warnings and

precautions when handling Traverse modules.
Important: Insert the module into the Traverse shelf using the guides at
the top and bottom of the card cage for proper alignment. Make sure the
module is vertical, from top to bottom and that the module stays in the
guides from the front to the back of the shelf.
Important: Modules should insert easily into the Traverse shelf, do not
force the module into position. If the module does not insert easily, slide it
back out and verify you are placing it in the correct position and inserting
the module into the correct guides top and bottom.
Important: To ensure EMI protection and proper cooling, place one-slot

wide blank faceplates in any empty Traverse slots.

Chapter 1 Precautions
ESD Jack Locations
Electrostatic To avoid damage to Traverse integrated circuits, a properly grounded Electrostatic

Discharge Discharge (ESD) wrist strap must be worn during the following installation and
Protection maintenance activities:
■ Handling Traverse modules.
■ Connecting copper or optical cables to the PDAP, Traverse main backplane, fiber
optic backplane and fan tray module.
ESD Jack ESD jacks are located on the following Traverse units:
Locations ■ Front inlet fan module; a component of the front inlet fan tray holder.
■ Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 standalone air ramp.
Use the ESD jacks to provide a ground for the ESD wrist strap.
ESD Jack
Figure 1-1 Front Inlet Fan Module ESD Jack Location
Back
Front
ESD Jack
ESD Jack
Front
Back
Figure 1-2 Air Ramp with ESD Jack Locations

ESD Jack Locations

SECTION 1BASIC PRECAUTIONS AND P ROCEDURES
Chapter 2
Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Introduction This chapter provides step-by-step instructions for removing back covers from the:
■ Traverse main backplane.
■ Fiber optic backplane.
■ Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP-2S and PDAP-4S).
Refer to this chapter as required while completing procedures in this volume. Use the
topic labels in the left margin to scan this document for the tasks you need to review.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to complete these procedures:
Equipment and ■ Traverse shelf.
Tools ■ PDAP.
■ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap.
■ Large flat blade screwdriver.
■ Large phillips head screwdriver.

Main Backplane Covers
Main Electrical connector modules (ECM) are used for network interface cabling using
Backplane standard copper/coax cables and connectors. Three types of main backplane covers are
Covers used (alarm and timing cover, power cover, and blank covers) to protect the main
backplane where ECMs are not plugged in. These covers are shown in the following
graphics along with the electrical connector modules.
Alarm and Timing

Cover
Blank Covers
Protruding Cover over

DCN Ethernet and
RS-232 RJ-45
Connectors
Electrical Connector
Modules
Power Cover
Figure 1-3 Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Main Backplane Covers
Covers are removed from the Traverse shelf during installation and cabling activities.
Covers must be replaced after cabling is complete to ensure air cooling from shelf to
shelf and electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection during normal operation.
Each cover is removed from the shelf chassis using a flat blade screwdriver to remove
the screws.
Important: Always wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

(ESD) wrist strap when removing back covers from the Traverse shelf as
there are static-sensitive components on the main backplane.

Chapter 2 Removing and Replacing Back Covers
Remove and Replace Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
Remove and The fiber optic management tray cover is removed during cabling activities. This cover
Replace Fiber must be replaced after cabling is complete to protect fiber optic connections during
Optic normal operation.
Management
Tray Cover (ESD) wrist strap when removing Traverse back covers as there are
static-sensitive components on the backplane.
Follow these instructions to remove the fiber optic management tray cover from a
Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf.
Table 1-1 Remove and Replace Traverse Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the three captive fasteners at the top of the fiber optic management
tray cover.
Captive Fasteners
Figure 1-4 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover with Fasteners
2 Pull the cover straight back to remove.

3 To replace the fiber optic management tray cover, line up the fasteners
with the holes at the top of the chassis.
4 Push the cover straight forward and tighten the fasteners.
5 The Remove and Replace Traverse Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover
procedure is complete.

Remove PDAP Protective Back Cover
Remove PDAP Follow these instructions to remove the PDAP protective back cover.
Protective
Back Cover WARNING! The protective back cover is removed from the PDAP-2S
or PDAP-4S during power cabling activities. PDAP back covers must
be replaced after cabling is complete and before –48 VDC power
supply cables are connected to the central office source. The PDAP
protective back cover must remain in place during normal operation
to protect against possible electric shock.
Table 1-2 Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover
Step Procedure
1 Loosen (you need not remove) the two thumb screws securing the
protective cover onto the back panel.
2 Pull the protective cover straight out to remove.
3 The Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover procedure is complete.
Replace PDAP Follow these instructions to replace the PDAP protective back cover.
Protective
Back Cover Table 1-3 Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover
Step Procedure
1 Align the protective cover to the back panel with the two thumb screws.
2 Tighten two thumb screws to secure the protective cover.
3 The Replace the PDAP Protective Back Cover procedure is complete.

Chapter 3
Cable Routing
Introduction The Traverse shelf1 has cable ports to secure alarm, battery and battery return
distribution, DS1, DS3, Ethernet, and timing interface cabling. This chapter provides
cable routing information.
■ Traverse Cable Ports–Left Side, page 1-12.
■ Copper and Coax Cable Routing, page 1-13.
■ Fiber Optic Cable Routing, page 1-14.
1
Information in this chapter applies to Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelves.

Traverse Cable Ports–Left Side
Traverse Cable There are cable ports on the left side of the Traverse shelf (when viewed from the
Ports–Left Side back). The following cables are routed through these ports:
■ Battery and battery return distribution.
■ 10/100BaseT Ethernet.
■ RS-232 modem.
■ Alarm.
■ Timing interface.
The following drawing shows how to bring these cables through the cable ports on the
left side of the Traverse 2000 shelf. Cabling routing is similar for the Traverse 1600
shelf.
Battery "B" Battery Return "A" Battery "A"
Distribution and "B" Distribution Visual Alarm Distribution
To Timing Interface Cabling
B A
DCN Ethernet and Battery Return "A" and "B"

RS-232 Cables Distribution
Battery "A" Battery "B"
Distribution Distribution
Figure 1-5 Traverse Main Backplane and PDAP-2S Cable Routing—Left Side

Chapter 3 Cable Routing
Copper and Coax Cable Routing
Copper and A cable management bar is used for coax and copper cable routing. The following
Coax Cable graphic shows a Traverse shelf equipped with 10/100BaseT, DS1/E1, and DS3/E3
Routing electrical connector modules, and a cable management bar. Coax and copper cables are
tie wrapped to the cable management bar and routed to the right side of the shelf (when
viewed from the back).
There is a small opening with a protruding cover in the left-most cover to allow routing
of DCN Ethernet and RS-232 cables.
Cable
Management
Bar
DCN
Ethernet and
RS-232
Cable
Opening Route Coax
and Copper
Cables to the
Right Side
Figure 1-6 Traverse Shelf with Electrical Connector Modules and Cable
Management Bar

Fiber Optic Cable Routing
Fiber Optic A fiber cable management tray is integrated into the fiber optic backplane cover for
Cable Routing routing fiber optic cables. Remove the fiber cable management tray cover, lay the
cables in the tray shelf and out to the left or right side following local procedures.
Replace the management tray cover. The cover holds the fibers in place. Continue to
route the fiber optic cables to the right or left side of the rack following local
procedures. The following drawing shows the location of the cable management tray.
Cover
Fiber optic cable is

routed out to the left
or right side
Fiber Cable
Management Tray
Fiber optic cable is

routed out to the left
or right side
Figure 1-7 Fiber Cable Management Tray

Chapter 4
Inserting and Removing Modules
Introduction The Traverse system provides full support for a wide range of data and voice services
over SONET transport lines. A fully loaded Traverse 1600 shelf contains a total of 16
modules:
■ Two General Control Modules (GCMs).
■ Up to 14 Service Interface Modules1 and VT Switch 2688 modules.
A fully loaded Traverse 2000 shelf contains a total of 20 modules:
■ Two GCMs.
■ Up to 18 Service Interface Modules and VT Switch 2688 modules.
Exact placement of these modules into Traverse shelf slots is explained in
Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and Guidelines,”
page 7-1. This chapter provides basic step-by-step instructions for inserting and
removing modules in both the Traverse 1600 shelf and Traverse 2000 shelf.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to insert and remove modules:
Equipment and ■ Module.
Tools ■ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap.
■ MPX cleaning kit for optical modules.
1
General Control Modules (GCMs) and Service Interface Modules are referred to as modules throughout
this chapter.

Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connector
Clean Fiber It is critical that optical MPX connectors are clean to ensure proper operation. Turin
Optic MPX recommends that you visually inspect the MPX connectors on both the fiber optic
Connector cables and optical modules using fiber optic magnification equipment. Turin also
recommends that you clean the MPX connectors using the following procedure.
Fiber optic cable MPX connectors must be cleaned just before inserting optical
modules to remove any visible dust or dirt. If the fiber optic backplane was pre-cabled,
each MPX connector must be removed from the backplane, cleaned and replaced into
the backplane.
Optical module MPX connectors must be cleaned just before inserting the module into
the Traverse shelf to remove any visible dust or dirt. MPX connectors on the fiber optic
cable and module are protected from dirt and dust once they are both connected at the
fiber optic backplane.
Traverse modules ship with an AMP Lightray™ MPX Cleaning Kit. For detailed
instructions on cleaning connectors, see the accompanying instruction sheet2.
WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a

class IIIb laser and is intended for operation in a closed environment


or connector, as it may cause eye damage.

(ESD) wrist strap when handling and placing modules in the Traverse
shelf. Follow all warnings and instructions included in module packaging
to prevent electrostatic damage.
2
Additional copies of the instruction sheet can be printed from Tyco’s AMP Web site www.amp.com. The
instruction sheet part number is 1457019-2.

Chapter 4 Inserting and Removing Modules
Important: Handle modules by the edges and face plate only. Do not
Important: Do not touch the end of the MPX connectors.
Table 1-4 Clean MPX Connectors
Step Procedure
1 Was the fiber optic cable pre-cabled?

■ If yes, continue to Step 2.
■ If no, continue to Step 3.
2 Remove the fiber optic cable MPX connector(s) from the fiber optic
backplane.
3 Clean the MPX connector on the fiber optic cable using the MPX cleaning
kit and by following the included instructions. The cleaning kit includes:
■ Instruction sheet.
■ Cleaning inserts.
■ Cleaning connector assembly.
■ Single bulkhead for cleaning fiber optic cable MPX connectors.

Table 1-4 Clean MPX Connectors (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Align the “white reference marker” on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the fiber optic backplane housing.
White Stripe
Reference Markers
Housing B
Housing A
Figure 1-8 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B
Note: 4-port OC-12/STM-4, and 1-port OC-48/STM-16 and OC-192/

STM-64 modules require one fiber optic cable placed in housing A.
Note: 8-port OC-3/STM-1 and GbE LX-VC modules require “transmit”
and “receive” fiber optic cables placed in housing A (transmit) and B
(receive).
5 Gently push the MPX connector back into the correct fiber optic backplane
housing.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each MPX connector.

Table 1-4 Clean MPX Connectors (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Remove the dust cap from the MPX connector(s) on the optical module.
Dust Cap on MPX
Connector
Figure 1-9 MPX Connector on Optical Module
8 Clean the MPX connector(s) on the optical module using the MPX
cleaning kit and by following the included instructions. The cleaning kit
includes:
■ Duplex bulkhead for cleaning the duplex MPX connectors on the
optical module.
9 Continue to the next procedure, Insert a Module.

Insert Modules
Insert Modules
Important: A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must be worn at all
times while handling Traverse modules to prevent damage to the circuitry.
Follow all warnings and instructions included in module packaging to
prevent any electrostatic damage.
Important: Each slot in the Traverse shelf has guides at the top and
bottom to properly align the module into position for contact with the
main and mesh backplanes. Use these guides to make sure the module is
vertical and properly aligned. This is easier to do if you are eye level with
the shelf.
Important: Each module has two guide pins on the back edge. These
guide pins go through the back bar of the shelf to accurately align the
modules with the mesh backplane. The GCM guide pins are sized
differently from the guide pins on other modules. This “keying” feature
ensures the GCM is placed only in slots GCMA or GCMB and that other
modules are not placed in these slots.

Insert Modules
Follow these steps to insert a module.
Table 1-5 Insert a Module
Step Procedure
1 Is this an optical module with MPX connectors?

■ If yes, complete the Clean MPX Connectors procedure before
proceeding.
2 Flip the module locking tabs up. Hold the module with the tabs parallel to
the top and bottom of the module.
Guide Pins
Locking Tabs in Open

Position
Figure 1-10 Module Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position

Insert Modules
Table 1-5 Insert a Module (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Important: Each slot in the Traverse shelf has guides at the top and
bottom to properly align the module into position for contact with the main
and mesh backplanes. Use these guides to make sure the module is vertical
and properly aligned. This is easier to do if you are eye level with the shelf.
Insert the module in the Traverse shelf using the guides at the top and
bottom of the card cage for proper alignment. Make sure the module is
vertical, from top to bottom and that the module stays in the guides from
the front to the back of the shelf.
Card Cage Guides for

Module Alignment
Figure 1-11 Traverse Shelf with Guides
4 Important: Modules should insert easily into the Traverse shelf, do not
5 Push the center of the module face until the locking tabs start to close and
the locking tabs start to roll around the lip of the Traverse shelf. The
optical modules make an audible “click” to indicate that it is making
contact with the fiber optic backplane connectors.

Insert Modules
Table 1-5 Insert a Module (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Push the locking tabs down. The tabs must close around the shelf top and
bottom to lock the module in place.
Locking Tabs in
Closed Position
Figure 1-12 Module Tabs in the Locked Position
7 Press the tabs into their locked position to secure the module. The module
is locked into position when the top and bottom tabs are pressed down
completely.
8 The Insert a Module procedure is complete.

Remove Modules
Remove
Modules Important: A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must be worn at all
Follow these instructions to remove modules.
Table 1-6 Remove a Module
Step Procedure
1 Flip the locking tabs up to unlock the module:
Locking Tabs in
Open Position
Figure 1-13 Module Tabs in the Unlocked Position
2 Hold the module with the tabs parallel to the top and bottom of the module
and pull it straight out of the slot.
3 The Remove a Module procedure is complete.

S ECTION 2 H ARDWARE I NSTALLATION
SECTION 2
Contents
Chapter 1
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Traverse System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
PDAP-2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
PDAP-4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Grounding the PDAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
PDAP 19-Inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Chapter 2
Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air Ramp
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Grounding the Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Standard Traverse Shelf Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Standard Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to
23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Chapter 3
Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Front Inlet Fan Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Chapter 4
Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air Ramp
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Grounding the Shelf and Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

Volume 2 Section 2 Hardware Installation
Traverse 1600 Shelf 19-inch and Traverse 2000 Shelf

23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Fan Tray Holder 19-inch and Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . 2-26
Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Traverse 1600 Air Ramp in 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Chapter 5
Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Required Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Fan Tray Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Fan Tray Air Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 PDAP-2S Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-2 PDAP-2S Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-4 PDAP-4S Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Figure 2-5 PDAP-2S Keyhole Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-6 PDAP-4S Keyhole Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Figure 2-7 PDAP 23-inch Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Figure 2-8 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Figure 2-9 Traverse 1600 Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-10 Traverse 2000 Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-11 Traverse 1600 Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Figure 2-13 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane . . . . . . . . 2-12
Figure 2-14 Traverse 1600 Shelf in a 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Figure 2-15 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane . . . . . . . . 2-15
Figure 2-16 Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a
23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Figure 2-17 Front Inlet Fan Module Captive Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Figure 2-18 Front Inlet Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Figure 2-19 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration in a 23-inch Rack . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Figure 2-20 Traverse 1600 Shelf and Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-21 Traverse 2000 Shelf and Fan Tray Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Figure 2-24 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Figure 2-25 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-26 Fan Tray Holder without Fan Tray Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Figure 2-27 Air Ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Figure 2-28 Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Figure 2-29 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Figure 2-30 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Figure 2-31 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . 2-33
Figure 2-32 Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Figure 2-33 Fan Tray Holder Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Figure 2-34 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 2-35 Traverse 2000 Fan Tray Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
Figure 2-36 Air Filter with Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Figure 2-38 Air Filter with Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
List of Tables
Table 2-1 PDAP 19-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Table 2-2 PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Table 2-3 Traverse 1600 Shelf 19-inch and Traverse 2000 Shelf
Table 2-4 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder (19-inch and 23-inch)
Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Table 2-5 Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation . . . . 2-13
Table 2-6 Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to
23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Table 2-7 Front Inlet Fan Module Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Table 2-8 Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Table 2-10 Fan Tray Holder 19-inch and Fan Tray Holder
Table 2-11 Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . 2-29
Table 2-12 Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Table 2-13 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation . . . . . . 2-32
Table 2-14 Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Table 2-15 Fan Tray Module Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Table 2-16 Fan Tray Air Filter (with springs) Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Table 2-17 Fan Tray Air Filter (with handle) Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40


SECTION 2HARDWARE I NSTALLATION
Chapter 1
Introduction The Traverse system consists of the following major components:

■ Power Distribution and Alarm Panel.
■ Traverse shelf.
■ Front inlet fan tray holder (with integrated air ramp).
■ Front inlet fan module.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to install a PDAP in a standard
7-foot, 19- or 23-inch telco rack. The instructions may be too detailed if you are
experienced in central office installations. In this case, scan the topic labels in the left
margin for tasks to review or refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Configuration
Checklists,” Hardware Installation Checklist, page 7-8.
Power There are two1 different PDAPs available with the Traverse system, the PDAP-2S and
Distribution PDAP-4S:
and Alarm ■ The PDAP-2S is used with the Traverse 1600 shelf and the Traverse 2000 shelf. It
Panel (PDAP) distributes power to up to two Traverse shelves. Alarm contacts are provided for
Descriptions connection of fuse and visual alarms only. The PDAP-2S does not receive alarm
signalling from the Traverse shelves and it is not required for termination of system
alarm contacts. Audible visual, remote visual, fail-safe and environmental alarm
contacts are terminated at the Traverse main backplane, not at the PDAP-2S.
■ The PDAP-4S is used with the Traverse 1600 shelf and the Traverse 2000 shelf. It
distributes power to up to four Traverse shelves. Alarm contacts are provided for
connection of power, visual and audible fuse, and visual bay alarms. The PDAP-4S
is not required to receive alarm signalling from the Traverse shelves or for
termination of system alarm contacts. Audible visual, remote visual, fail-safe and
environmental alarm contacts are terminated at the Traverse main backplane, not at
the PDAP-4S.
1
Refer to pre-Release 1.3 Traverse system documentation for information about the original PDAP type
(Model#: TPA-PDAP).

Volume 2, Section 2: Hardware Installation
Traverse System Configuration
Both types of PDAPs are considered optional components of the Traverse system and
are used to:
■ Terminate redundant –48 VDC central office battery.
■ Terminate central office battery return.
■ Distribute redundant battery and battery return.
■ Provide power protection for Traverse shelves and auxiliary equipment. The
PDAP-2S provides 40 ampere (amp) circuit breakers2 for up to two Traverse
shelves and GMT fuses (from 0.25 amps to 10 amps per fuse) for up to 10 pieces of
auxiliary equipment. The PDAP-4S provides 40 amp TPA fuses2 for up to four
Traverse shelves and GMT fuses (from 0.25 amps to 15 amps per fuse) for up to 5
pieces of auxiliary equipment.
■ Visually display input power, fuse power, and critical, major, and minor bay
alarms.
Please refer to Section 4—Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling,
Chapter 1—“Traverse System Alarm Interface” for additional information.
Traverse Up to four Traverse shelves, front inlet fan tray holders with integrated air ramps, and a
System PDAP-4S can be installed in a single-rack configuration. The PDAP-2S accommodates
Configuration up to two Traverse shelves in a single-rack configuration. Other hardware that may be
installed in the same or adjacent rack with the Traverse system are:
■ 10/100BaseT patch panel.
■ DS1 patch panel.
■ Fiber optic patch panel.
■ TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and required Power Distribution Unit (PDU)3.
■ Other third-party equipment as required.
2
Optional PDAP-2S circuit breakers and PDAP-4S TPA fuses are available up to a 50 amp maximum.
3
Refer to the TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and PDU customer documentation for more information.

Chapter 1 Power Distribution and Alarm Panel
PDAP-4S
PDAP-2S The PDAP-2S layout is diagrammed in the following figures.

Circuit Breakers GMT Fuses Alarm LEDs Flange
Figure 2-1 PDAP-2S Front View
Battery Supply
NEG VDC Input
Battery Distribution
Battery Return Supply
and Distribution
Chassis Ground
Figure 2-2 PDAP-2S Rear View
PDAP-4S The following illustrations show the front and rear views of the PDAP-4S.
TPA Fuses GMT Fuses Alarm LEDs Flange
Battery and Battery Battery and Battery

Return “B” Supply Return “A” Supply
Battery and Battery Return
Distribution Terminal Blocks
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Chassis Ground Chassis Ground

Figure 2-4 PDAP-4S Rear View

Grounding the PDAP
Grounding the The PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S) is grounded to the rack using conductive plated
PDAP rack adapters (required for 23-inch rack installation) and thread-forming screws. No
additional grounding procedures are required when installed in a properly grounded
telco rack.
There is a chassis ground location on the back of the PDAP-2S (see Figure 2-2) and on
both sides of the PDAP-4S (see Figure 2-4) for connecting optional grounding wire.
Connect the grounding wire to the PDAP and to a confirmed source of earth ground.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the PDAP-2S and PDAP-4S:
Equipment and ■ Standard 7-foot, 19-or 23-inch telco rack.
Tools ■ Standard conductive plated rack adapters (19-inch equipment to 23-inch rack) with
tread-forming screws required for 23-inch telco rack installation.4
■ PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S.
■ Large phillips head screwdriver or lex socket.
■ Four 12-24 thread-forming screws.
■ #10 AWG green ground wire (optional).
■ Stepladder (optional).
4
Two 1-Rack Unit (RU) rack adapters are required for PDAP-2S and PDAP-4S 23-inch rack installation.
The PDAP, Traverse 1600 shelf, fan tray holder, and air ramp can be installed in a 23-inch rack using two
15-RU rack adapters instead of individual rack adapters for each piece of equipment.

Chapter 1 Power Distribution and Alarm Panel
PDAP 19-Inch Rack Installation
PDAP 19-Inch Install the PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S) at the top (using the first set of mounting
Rack holes) of a 7-foot standard rack above the first Traverse shelf. Install the PDAP in the
Installation central office bay and rack designated by your engineering work order.
Table 2-1 PDAP 19-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 Both PDAPs have a flange with a keyhole slot. Partially tighten a 12-24
thread-forming screw in the correct position on each side of the rack, leave
about 1/4 inch of space between the rack and the screw head.
Keyhole
Slots
Figure 2-5 PDAP-2S Keyhole Slots
Keyhole
Slots
Figure 2-6 PDAP-4S Keyhole Slots
2 Position and lower the PDAP so the keyhole slots rest on the partially
tightened screws.
3 Tighten screws.
4 Place two additional screws and tighten to secure and ground the PDAP to
the rack.
5 The PDAP 19-inch Rack Installation procedure is complete.

PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
PDAP to Use standard conductive plated rack adapters to install a PDAP (PDAP-2S or
23-inch Rack PDAP-4S) in a 23-inch telco rack. Rack adapters come with thread-forming mounting
Adaptation screws and in various lengths depending on your installation requirements.
Installation Install the PDAP at the top (using the first set of mounting holes) of a 7-foot standard
rack above the first Traverse shelf. Install the PDAP in the central office bay and rack
designated on your engineering work order.
Table 2-2 PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Step Procedure
1 Install conductive plated rack adapters on both sides of the rack. Align the
rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
2 Place and tighten thread-forming screws through the rack adapter slots and
into the rack. Thread-forming screws are used to ground the rack adapters
(and PDAP) to the rack.
3 Lift and position the PDAP into the rack. Line up the holes in the PDAP
flange to the threaded holes in the rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-7 PDAP 23-inch Rack Installation
4 Tighten two screws on each side of the PDAP to secure it to the rack
adapter.
5 The PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation procedure is complete.

Chapter 2
Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with
Integrated Air Ramp
Introduction The Traverse system consists of the following major components:

■ Power Distribution and Alarm Panel.
■ Traverse shelf.
Important: The instructions in this chapter support the redesigned front

inlet fan tray with integrated air ramp unit. Refer to Section 2—Hardware
Installation, Chapter 4—“Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air
Ramp” if you are installing the original fan tray unit with a separate air
ramp unit.
This chapter provides the following information including step-by-step instructions on

how to install the Traverse shelf and front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air ramp
into a standard 7-foot, 19- or 23-inch telco rack.
■ Traverse System Configuration, page 2-8.
■ Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Shelves, page 2-9.
■ Grounding the Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder, page 2-10.
■ Required Equipment and Tools, page 2-10.
■ Standard Traverse Shelf Rack Installation, page 2-10.
■ Standard Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder Rack Installation, page 2-12.
■ Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation, page 2-13.
■ Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to 23-inch Rack Adaptation
Installation, page 2-15.


The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in central office
installations. In this case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to review or
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Configuration Checklists,” Hardware
Installation Checklist, page 7-8.
Traverse Up to four Traverse shelves, front inlet fan tray holders with integrated air ramps, and
System the PDAP-4S can be installed in a single-rack configuration. Other hardware that may
Configuration be installed in the same or adjacent rack with the Traverse system are:
■ TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and required Power Distribution Unit (PDU)1
SD
PDAP-4S
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
P1 P1
Traverse 1600
Fan Tray with

integrated air ramp
Figure 2-8 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration
1

Chapter 2 Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air Ramp
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 Shelves
Traverse 1600 The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelf and front inlet fan tray holder (with fan
and Traverse module) are diagrammed in the following figures.
2000 Shelves
Module (Card) Bay
Flanges
Front Inlet Fan

Tray Holder
Figure 2-9 Traverse 1600 Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
Module (Card) Bay

Flanges
Front Inlet Fan

Tray Holder
Figure 2-10 Traverse 2000 Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
Both the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelf have removable back covers to provide
access to the fiber optic backplane, main backplane, and front inlet fan tray holder
connector. The covers are easily removed for cabling but must be replaced during
normal operation to ensure proper air flow and electromagnetic interference (EMI)
protection.

Grounding the Shelf and Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
Grounding the The Traverse shelf and front inlet fan tray holder are grounded to the rack using
Shelf and Front thread-forming screws and conductive plated rack adapters (as required for Traverse
Inlet Fan Tray 1600 23-inch rack installation). No additional grounding procedures are required when
Holder installed in a properly grounded telco rack.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the Traverse 1600 or Traverse
Equipment and 2000 shelf and front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air ramp:
Tools ■ Standard 7-foot, 19- or 23-inch telco rack.
■ Standard conductive plated rack adapters2 (19-inch equipment to 23-inch rack)
with tread-forming screws required for Traverse 1600 shelf 23-inch telco rack
installation.
■ Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf.
■ Large phillips head screwdriver or hex socket.
■ Fourteen 12-24 thread-forming screws.
■ A second person to lift and position the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf. The
Traverse 1600 shelf weighs 15 lbs. without cards. The Traverse 2000 shelf weighs
16 lbs. without cards.
Standard Install the Traverse shelf in the central office bay and rack designated by your
Traverse Shelf engineering work order using a minimum of six 12-24 thread-forming screws.
Rack
Important: Install the first Traverse shelf below the PDAP in the rack. A
Installation
3/8-inch space is required between the PDAP and the first Traverse shelf
to allow for proper air flow.
23-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 Lift the Traverse shelf to its assigned position in the rack.

2 Align the flange holes with the holes in the rack.
Note: The Traverse shelf flange has three 1-RU slots at the top, middle
and bottom for easy alignment.
2
Two 2-Rack Unit (RU) rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 front inlet fan tray holder 23-inch
rack installation. Two 10-RU rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 shelf 23-inch rack installation.
The PDAP, Traverse 1600 shelf, and front inlet fan tray holder can be installed in a 23-inch rack using
two 15-RU rack adapters instead of individual rack adapters for each piece of equipment.

Standard Traverse Shelf Rack Installation
23-inch Rack Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Place thread-forming screws through at least one small flange slot and two
1-RU flange slots on each side of the shelf and into the rack.
1-RU Slots
Figure 2-11 Traverse 1600 Shelf
1-RU
Slots
4 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the shelf.

5 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the shelf to the rack.
6 Continue to the next procedure, Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder (19-inch and
23-inch) Rack Installation.

Standard Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder Rack Installation
Standard Front The front inlet fan tray holder with fan module (see page 2-18 for fan module
Inlet Fan Tray installation information) is required to cool the Traverse shelf during normal operation.
Holder Rack
Important: Install the front inlet fan tray holder directly below the
Installation
Traverse shelf so that no gap remains in order to ensure proper air flow.
Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 It is easier to connect the front inlet fan tray holder power cable to the
Traverse backplane before installing the front inlet fan tray holder in the
rack. Grasp the power cable and bring it out the top of the front inlet fan
tray holder.
2 Bring the fan tray holder power cable with the 18-pin connector up to its
mating connector on the Traverse main backplane. Push up on the
connector until it locks into position. The tab on the connector locks it into
place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Front Inlet Fan

Tray Power
Cable
Front Inlet Fan Tray

Holder Internal
Connector
Figure 2-13 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane
3 Lift and position the fan tray holder directly below the Traverse shelf so
that there is no gap between the shelf and the fan tray holder.
Note: The front inlet fan tray holder flange has two 1-RU slots.
4 Align the flange holes with the holes on the rack.
5 Place thread-forming screws through the flange slot on each side of the
front inlet fan tray holder and into the rack.
6 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the front inlet fan
tray holder.

Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Rack Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the front inlet fan tray holder to
the rack.
8 The Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder (19-inch and 23-inch) Rack Installation
Traverse 1600 Use standard rack adapters to install a Traverse 1600 shelf in a 23-inch telco rack. Rack
Shelf to adapters come with thread-forming mounting screws and in various lengths depending
23-inch Rack on your installation requirements.
Adaptation Install the Traverse 1600 shelf in the central office bay and rack designated by your
Installation engineering work order using a minimum of six 12-24 thread-forming screws.
Important: Install the first Traverse below the PDAP in the rack. A
3/8-inch space is required between the PDAP and the first Traverse 1600
shelf to allow for proper air flow.
Table 2-5 Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Step Procedure
1 Install conductive plated rack adapters on both sides of the rack. Align and
position the rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
2 Place and tighten six thread-forming screws through the rack adapter slots
and into the rack. Thread-forming screws are used to ground the rack
adapters (and Traverse 1600 shelf) to the rack.

Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Table 2-5 Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Lift and position the Traverse 1600 shelf to its assigned position in the
rack. Line up the holes in the shelf flange with the threaded holes in the
rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-14 Traverse 1600 Shelf in a 23-inch Rack Installation
4 Place and tighten three screws on each side of the shelf to secure it to the
rack adapters and rack.
5 Continue to the next procedure, Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder
to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation.

Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Traverse 1600 Use standard conductive plated rack adapters to install a Traverse 1600 front inlet fan
Front Inlet Fan tray holder in a 23-inch telco rack. Rack adapters come with thread-forming mounting
Tray Holder to screws and in various lengths depending on your installation requirements.
23-inch Rack The front inlet fan tray holder with fan module (see page 2-18 for fan module
Adaptation installation information) is required to cool the Traverse 1600 shelf during normal
Installation operation. Follow these front inlet fan tray holder power cabling and installation steps.
Important: Install the front inlet fan tray holder directly below the
Traverse 1600 shelf so that no gap remains in order to ensure proper air
flow.

23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation
Step Procedure
1 Install conductive plated rack adapters on both sides of the rack. Align and
position the rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
(and front inlet fan tray holder) to the rack.
3 It is easier to connect the front inlet fan tray holder power cable to the
Traverse 1600 backplane before installing the front inlet fan tray holder in
the rack. Grasp the power cable and bring it out the top of the front inlet
fan tray holder.
4 Bring the front inlet fan tray holder power cable with the 18-pin connector
up to its mating connector on the Traverse 1600 main backplane. Push up
on the connector until it locks into position. The tab on the connector locks
it into place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Front Inlet Fan

Tray Power
Cable
Front Inlet Fan Tray

Holder Internal
Connector
Figure 2-15 Front Inlet Fan Tray Connection at the Main Backplane

Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation

23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Lift and position the front inlet fan tray holder in the rack directly below
the Traverse 1600 shelf so that there is no gap between the shelf and the
fan tray holder. Line up the holes in the front inlet fan tray holder flange
with the threaded holes in the rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-16 Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder in a

6 Place and tighten two screws on each side of the front inlet fan tray holder
to secure it to the rack adapters and rack.
7 The Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to 23-inch Rack
Adaptation Installation procedure is complete.

Chapter 3
Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Introduction The front inlet fan tray holder and fan module are required to cool the Traverse shelf
during normal operation. The front inlet fan module holds 5 fans in Traverse 1600 and
6 fans in Traverse 2000 installations. It draws cooling air from the front and pushes the
air upward through the Traverse shelf. The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 front inlet
fan tray holder and fan module dimensions are different but the overall design is the
same.
Important: The instructions in this chapter support the redesigned front

inlet fan tray with integrated air ramp unit. Refer to Section 2—Hardware
Installation, Chapter 4—“Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air
Ramp” if you are installing the original fan tray unit with a separate air
ramp unit.
The front inlet fan tray holder is shipped without the fan module or air filter in place.
Front inlet fan tray holder power cabling and installation instructions are provided in
Chapter 2—“Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air Ramp,” page 2-7.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the front inlet fan
module and air filter into the front inlet fan tray holder.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the front inlet fan module and
Equipment and air filter:
Tools ■ Front inlet fan tray holder (with integrated air ramp).
■ Air filter1.
1
Front inlet fan tray air filters are available in 63% arrestance at 300 FPM (feet per minute) and 80%
arrestance at 300 FPM depending on your installation requirements.

Front Inlet Fan Module Installation
Front Inlet Fan Follow these instructions to install the front inlet fan module into the front inlet fan tray
Module holder.
Installation
Important: Wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
wrist strap when installing the fan module as it contains static-sensitive
components.
Table 2-7 Front Inlet Fan Module Installation
Step Procedure
1 Lift the front inlet fan module level with the front inlet fan tray holder.
Slide the fan module into the front of the fan tray holder and push it
straight in until the two connectors engage.
2 The front inlet fan module is in the correct position when it is flush with
the front of the fan tray holder.
Important: Do not force the fan module into position. If it does not plug
in easily, slide it back out and check for any obstructions or a damaged
connector that might prevent it from sliding into position.
3 Tighten the captive screws to secure it.
Captive Screws
Figure 2-17 Front Inlet Fan Module Captive Screws
4 Continue to the next procedure, Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation.

Chapter 3 Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation
Front Inlet Fan The front inlet fan module requires a foam air filter that is placed at the top of the front
Tray Air Filter inlet fan tray holder—after the fan module is installed. The front inlet fan tray air filters
Installation are available in 63% or 80% arrestance at 300 FPM (feet per minute) depending on
your installation requirements.
The following procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the front
inlet fan tray air filter.
Table 2-8 Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation
Step Procedure
1 Rotate the air filter pull-tab out.
Pull Tab (top view)
Pull Tab (front view)
Figure 2-18 Front Inlet Air Filter
2 Insert the air filter in the gap between the top of the front inlet fan module
and the top of the front inlet fan tray holder. Slide the air filter along the
fan tray holder guides until the filter is flush with the front of the fan tray
holder.
3 Rotate the pull tab back into place so it is parallel to the front edge of the
air filter.
4 The Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation procedure is complete.

Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation

Chapter 4
Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air Ramp
Introduction This chapter applies to the original fan tray unit with separate air ramp unit
(pre-Release 1.4)1.
The Traverse system consists of the following major components:
■ Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S).
■ Fan tray holder.
■ Fan tray module.
■ Air ramp.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to install a:
■ Traverse 1600 shelf, fan tray holder and air ramp in a standard 7-foot, 19- or
23-inch telco rack.
■ Traverse 2000 shelf, fan tray holder and air ramp in a standard 23-inch telco rack.

The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in central office
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Configuration Checklists,” Hardware
Installation Checklist, page 7-8.
1
Refer to Section 2—Hardware Installation, Chapter 2—“Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with
Integrated Air Ramp” if you are installing the redesigned front inlet fan tray with integrated air ramp
unit.

Traverse Up to two Traverse shelves, fan tray holders, air ramps, and the PDAP-2S can be
System installed in a single-rack configuration. Up to four Traverse shelves, fan tray holders,
Configuration air ramps, and the PDAP-4S can be installed in a single-rack configuration. Other
hardware that may be installed in the same or adjacent rack with the Traverse system
are:
■ TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux and required Power Distribution Unit (PDU)2
SD
PDAP-2S
Traverse 1600 Shelf
Fan Tray Holder

Air Ramp
Figure 2-19 Traverse 1600 Rack Configuration in a 23-inch Rack
2

Chapter 4 Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air Ramp
Grounding the Shelf and Fan Tray Holder
Traverse 1600 The Traverse 1600 shelf and fan tray holder are diagrammed in the following figure.
and Traverse
2000 Shelves
Module (Card) Bay
Flange
Fan Tray Holder
Figure 2-20 Traverse 1600 Shelf and Fan Tray Holder
Module (Card) Bay

Flange
Fan Tray Holder
Figure 2-21 Traverse 2000 Shelf and Fan Tray Holder
Both the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelf have removable back covers to provide
access to the fiber optic backplane, main backplane, and fan tray holder. The covers are
easily removed for cabling but must be replaced during normal operation to ensure
proper air flow and electromagnetic interference (EMI) protection.
Grounding the The Traverse shelf and fan tray holder are grounded to the rack using conductive plated
Shelf and Fan rack adapters (required for Traverse 1600 23-inch rack installation) and thread-forming
Tray Holder screws. No additional grounding procedures are required when installed in a properly
grounded telco rack.

Required Equipment and Tools
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the Traverse 1600 or Traverse
Equipment and 2000 shelf, fan tray holder and air ramp:
Tools ■ Standard 7-foot, 19- or 23-inch telco rack.
■ Standard conductive plated rack adapters3 (19-inch equipment to 23-inch rack)
with tread-forming screws required for Traverse 1600 shelf 23-inch telco rack
installation.
■ Fan tray holder.
■ Air ramp.
■ Large phillips head screwdriver or hex socket.
■ Wrench with 1/4-inch nut driver or hex socket.
■ Fourteen 12-24 thread-forming screws.
■ A second person to lift and position the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf. The
Traverse 1600 shelf weighs 15 lbs. without cards. The Traverse 2000 shelf weighs
16 lbs. without cards.
Traverse 1600 Install the first Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 shelf below the PDAP in the rack.
Shelf 19-inch
Important: A 3/8-inch space is required between the PDAP and the first
and Traverse
Traverse shelf to allow for proper air flow.
2000 Shelf
23-inch Rack
Installation Install the Traverse shelf in the central office bay and rack designated by your
engineering work order. The Traverse shelf is installed using a minimum of six 12-24
thread-forming screws.
Step Procedure
1 Lift the Traverse shelf to its assigned position in the rack.

2 Align the flange holes with the holes in the rack.
Note: The Traverse shelf flange has three 1-RU slots at the top, middle
and bottom for easy alignment.
3
Four 1-Rack Unit (RU) rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 fan tray holder and air ramp 23-inch
rack installation. Two 10-RU rack adapters are required for Traverse 1600 shelf 23-inch rack installation.
The PDAP, Traverse 1600 shelf, fan tray holder and air ramp can be installed in a 23-inch rack using two
15-RU rack adapters instead of individual rack adapters for each piece of equipment.

Traverse 1600 Shelf 19-inch and Traverse 2000 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
3 Place thread-forming screws through at least one small flange slot and two
1-RU flange slots on each side of the shelf and into the rack.
1-RU Slots
1-RU
Slots
4 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the shelf.

5 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the shelf to the rack.
6 Continue to the next procedure, Fan Tray Holder 19-inch and Fan Tray
Holder 23-inch Rack Installation.

Fan Tray Holder 19-inch and Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation
Fan Tray The fan tray holder (with fan tray module, see page 2-36 for installation information) is
Holder 19-inch required to cool the Traverse shelf during normal operation. The fan tray holder must
and Fan Tray be installed directly below the Traverse shelf. Follow these fan tray holder power
Holder 23-inch cabling and installation steps.
Rack
Installation Table 2-10 Fan Tray Holder 19-inch and Fan Tray Holder
Step Procedure
1 It is easier to connect the fan tray holder power cable to the Traverse
backplane before installing the fan tray holder in the rack.
2 Remove the back panel from the fan tray holder by loosening the two
thumbscrews. The power cable is connected to the inside of the fan tray
holder back panel.
Fan Tray Holder Back Panel
Front
Figure 2-24 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel

Step Procedure
mating connector on the Traverse main backplane. Push up on the
place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Fan Tray Power

Cable
Fan Tray Holder
Back Panel Fan Tray Holder Connector
Figure 2-25 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane
4 Lift and position the fan tray holder directly below the Traverse shelf.
Note: The fan tray holder flange has one 1-RU slot.
6 Place thread-forming screws through the flange slot on each side of the fan
tray holder and into the rack.
Figure 2-26 Fan Tray Holder without Fan Tray Module

Step Procedure
7 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the fan tray
holder.
8 Tighten the screws to secure and ground the fan tray holder to the rack.
9 Bring the fan tray holder power cable (connected to the fan tray holder
back panel) into position at the back of the fan tray holder. Line up the
male connector to the female connector on the fan tray holder while
tightening the back panel thumb screws.
10 Continue to the next procedure, Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch
Rack Installation.

Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation
Air Ramp The air ramp must be installed directly below the fan tray holder, follow these
19-inch and Air installation steps.
Ramp 23-inch
Rack Table 2-11 Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation
Installation
Step Procedure
1 Lift and position the air ramp directly below the fan tray holder—see
Step 2, Figure 2-27 Air Ramp for front view.
Note: The air ramp flange has one 1-RU slot.
3 Place thread-forming screws through the flanges on each side of the air
ramp and into the rack.
Back
Front
Figure 2-27 Air Ramp
4 Partially tighten the thread-forming screws and position the air ramp.
5 Tighten the screws to secure the air ramp to the rack.
6 The Air Ramp 19-inch and Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation procedure
is complete.

Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation
Traverse 1600 Use standard rack adapters to install a Traverse 1600 shelf in a 23-inch telco rack. Rack
Shelf 23-inch adapters come with thread-forming mounting screws and in various lengths depending
Rack on your installation requirements.
Installation
Important: The first Traverse 1600 is installed below the PDAP in the
rack. A 3/8-inch space is required between the PDAP and the first
Traverse 1600 shelf to allow for proper air flow.
Install the Traverse 1600 shelf in the central office bay and rack designated by your
engineering work order. The Traverse 1600 shelf is installed in the rack using a
minimum of six 12-24 thread-forming screws.
Table 2-12 Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 Conductive plated rack adapters are installed on both sides of the rack.
Align and position the rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
2 Place and tighten six thread-forming screws through the rack adapter slots
and into the rack. Thread-forming screws are used to ground the rack
adapters (and Traverse 1600 shelf) to the rack.
3 Lift and position the Traverse 1600 shelf to its assigned position in the
rack. Line up the holes in the shelf flange with the threaded holes in the
rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-28 Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation

Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation
Table 2-12 Traverse 1600 Shelf 23-inch Rack Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Place and tighten three screws on each side of the shelf to secure it to the
5 Continue to the next procedure, Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch
Rack Installation.

Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation
Traverse 1600 The fan tray holder (with fan tray module, see page 2-36 for installation information) is
Fan Tray required to cool the Traverse 1600 shelf during normal operation. The fan tray holder
Holder 23-inch must be installed directly below the Traverse 1600 shelf.
Rack Use standard conductive plated rack adapters to install a Traverse 1600 fan tray holder
Installation in a 23-inch telco rack. Rack adapters come with thread-forming mounting screws and
in various lengths depending on your installation requirements. Follow these fan tray
holder power cabling and installation steps.
Table 2-13 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 It is easier to connect the fan tray holder power cable to the Traverse 1600
backplane before installing it in the rack. Remove the back panel from the
fan tray holder by loosening the two thumbscrews.
Fan Tray Holder Back Panel
Front
Figure 2-29 Fan Tray Holder Back Panel
Note: The fan tray holder power cable is connected to the inside of the
fan tray holder back panel.
mating connector on the Traverse 1600 main backplane. Push up on the
place.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Main Backplane
Fan Tray Holder
Connector
Fan Tray Power

Cable
Fan Tray Holder
Back Panel
Fan Tray Connector
Figure 2-30 Fan Tray Cable Connection at the Main Backplane

Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation
Table 2-13 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Conductive plated rack adapters are installed on both sides of the rack.
Align and position the rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
(and fan tray holder) to the rack.
5 Lift and position the fan tray holder in the rack directly below the Traverse
1600 shelf. Line up the holes in the fan tray holder flange with the threaded
holes in the rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-31 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Holder 23-inch Rack Installation
6 Place and tighten two screws on each side of the fan tray holder to secure it
to the rack adapters and rack.
7 Bring the fan tray holder power cable (connected to the fan tray holder
back panel) into position at the back of the fan tray holder. Line up the
male connector to the female connector on the fan tray holder while
tightening the back panel thumb screws.
8 Continue to the next procedure, Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack
Installation.

Traverse 1600 Air Ramp in 23-inch Rack Installation
Traverse 1600 Use standard rack adapters to install a Traverse 1600 air ramp in a 23-inch telco rack.
Air Ramp in Rack adapters come with mounting screws and in various lengths depending on your
23-inch Rack installation requirements.
Installation The air ramp must be installed directly below the fan tray holder, follow these
installation steps.
Table 2-14 Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation
Step Procedure
1 Rack adapters are installed on both sides of the rack. Align and position
the rack adapter slots with the holes in the rack.
(and air ramp) to the rack.
3 Lift and position the air ramp directly below the fan tray holder, see
Figure 2-27 Air Ramp, page 2-29, for front and back view. Line up the
holes in the air ramp flange with the threaded holes in the rack adapter.
SD
Figure 2-32 Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation
4 Place and tighten screws on each side of the air ramp to secure it to the
5 The Traverse 1600 Air Ramp 23-inch Rack Installation procedure is
complete.

Chapter 5
Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Introduction This chapter applies to the original fan tray unit without an integrated air ramp
(pre-Release 1.4)1.
The fan tray holder and fan module are required to cool the Traverse shelf during
normal operation. The fan tray module holds ten fans, it draws cooling air from the
front and pushes the air upward through the Traverse shelf. The Traverse 1600 and
Traverse 2000 fan tray holder and fan tray module dimensions are different but the
overall design is the same.
The fan tray holder is shipped without the fan tray module or air filter in place. Fan tray
holder power cabling and installation instructions are provided in Chapter
4—“Traverse Shelf, Fan Tray and Separate Air Ramp,” page 2-21. This chapter
provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the fan tray module and air filter
into the fan tray holder for both the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 models.
Required The following equipment and tools are required to install the fan tray module and air
Equipment and filter:
Tools ■ Fan tray holder.
■ Fan tray module.
■ Air filter2.
1
Refer to Section 2—Hardware Installation, Chapter 3—“Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter
Installation” if you are installing the front inlet fan module and air filter into the redesigned front inlet
fan tray with integrated air ramp unit.
2
Fan tray air filters are available in 63% arrestance at 300 FPM (feet per minute) and 80% arrestance at
300 FPM depending on your installation requirements.

Fan Tray Module Installation
Fan Tray Follow these instructions to install the fan tray module into the fan tray holder.
Module
Installation Important: Wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)
wrist strap when installing the fan tray module as it contains
static-sensitive components.
Table 2-15 Fan Tray Module Installation
Step Procedure
1 Loosen the two captive screws on the fan tray holder front cover to release
it.
Captive Fasteners
Figure 2-33 Fan Tray Holder Front Cover
2 Lower the fan tray holder front cover.

Chapter 5 Fan Module and Air Filter Installation
Fan Tray Module Installation
Table 2-15 Fan Tray Module Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Lift the fan tray module level with the fan tray holder. Slide the fan tray
module into the fan tray holder along guides and push it straight in until it
connects to the fan tray holder.
Fan Tray Module
Connector
Fan Tray Holder

Guides
Figure 2-34 Traverse 1600 Fan Tray Module Installation
Fan Tray Module

Connector
Fan Tray Holder
Guides
Figure 2-35 Traverse 2000 Fan Tray Module Installation
4 The fan tray module is in its correct position when it is slightly recessed
from the front of the fan tray holder.
Important: Do not force the fan tray module into position. If it does not
plug in easily, slide it back out and check for any obstructions or a
damaged connector that might prevent it from sliding into position.
5 Continue to the next procedure, Fan Tray Air Filter (with springs)
Installation or Fan Tray Air Filter (with handle) Installation.

Fan Tray Air Filter Installation
Fan Tray Air The fan tray module requires a foam air filter that is placed — between the fan tray
Filter module and the top of the fan tray holder—after the fan tray module is installed. There
Installation are two different designs of fan tray air filters. Both designs are available in 63% or
80% arrestance at 300 FPM (feet per minute) depending on your installation
requirements.
The following procedures document placement of both types of fan tray air filters. The
first procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the air filter with
springs on the back edge and pull tabs on the front edge.
Table 2-16 Fan Tray Air Filter (with springs) Installation
Step Procedure
1 Rotate the air filter pull-tabs out.

Springs
Pull Tabs
Figure 2-36 Air Filter with Springs
2 Hold the air filter with the metal window-pane side down and the springs
to the back.
3 Insert the air filter in the gap between the fan tray module and the top of
the fan tray holder. Slide the air filter along the fan tray holder guides until
the springs on the back edge are fully compressed.
4 With the springs fully compressed, lift the front edge of the air filter up and
over the retaining flanges, and release it.
5 Rotate the pull-tabs so they are parallel to the front edge of the air filter.

Table 2-16 Fan Tray Air Filter (with springs) Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Lift the fan tray holder front cover into its closed position. Tighten the
captive fasteners to secure it.
Captive Fasteners
Note: The front cover closes very easily when the fan tray module and air
filter are in position. If the cover does not close easily, check the fan tray
module to make sure it is recessed from the front of the fan tray holder.
7 The Fan Tray Air Filter (with springs) Installation procedure is complete.

The following procedure provides step-by-step instructions on how to install the fan
tray filter with a handle on the front edge.
Table 2-17 Fan Tray Air Filter (with handle) Installation
Step Procedure
1 Hold the air filter with the metal window-pane side down with the handle
to the front.
Handle
Figure 2-38 Air Filter with Handle
2 Insert the air filter in the gap between the fan tray module and the top of
the fan tray holder.
3 Slide the air filter along the fan tray holder guides. Lift up on the filter
handle as you are pushing the filter towards the back of the fan tray holder.
There is an audible “click” when the air filter is in position and the handle
drops down over the front of the fan tray module.

Table 2-17 Fan Tray Air Filter (with handle) Installation (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Lift the fan tray holder front cover into its closed position. Tighten the
captive fasteners to secure it.
Captive Fasteners
Note: The front cover closes very easily when the fan tray module and air
filter are in position. If the cover does not close easily, check the fan tray
module to make sure it is recessed from the front of the fan tray holder.
5 The Fan Tray Air Filter (with handle) Installation procedure is complete.


S ECTION 3 N ETWORK I NTERFACE C ABLING
SECTION 3NETWORK INTERFACE C ABLING
Contents
Chapter 1
Electrical Connector Module Descriptions
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
ECM Placement at the Traverse Main Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
ECM and Module Placement Planning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Electrical Connection Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Network Interface Cabling using ECMs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Chapter 2
DS1 Cabling
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
2-Slot ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
DS1 Module Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
DS1 Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes . . . . . . . . 3-17
Chapter 3
DS3 Cabling
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
2-Slot ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
3-Slot ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Traverse 1600 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Traverse 2000 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
DS3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
DS3 Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34

Volume 2 Section 3 Network Interface Cabling
Chapter 4
10/100BaseTX Cabling
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
2-Slot ECM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
10/100BaseTX Unprotected Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
24-port 10/100BaseTX Pinouts and Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
2-port GbE plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo Pinouts and
Cable Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Chapter 5
Fiber Optic Cabling
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
MPX Connectors and Fiber Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51
MPX Connector Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Fiber Optic Color Code and Fiber Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Fiber Optic Color Code 1-port Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Fiber Optical Color Code GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Modules . . . . . . . 3-55
Fiber Optic Color Code 4-port Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
Fiber Optical Color Code 8-port Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56
Fiber Optical Color Code GbE plus 100BaseFX Combo Module . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Traverse 1600 Fiber Optic Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Traverse 2000 Fiber Optic Backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Fiber Optic Patch Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Fiber Optic Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-60
Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
List of Figures
Figure 3-1 Electrical Connector Modules (Front View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-2 2-Slot ECM Placement—Traverse 2000 Main Backplane . . . . . . 3-2
Figure 3-3 2-Slot ECM Plugged into Traverse 1600 Main Backplane . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-5 DS1/E1 ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-6 DS1/E1 ECM—1:2 Protection Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Figure 3-8 DS1/E1 ECM Drain Wire Stud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Figure 3-9 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Figure 3-14 2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Figure 3-15 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Figure 3-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) Electrical Connector Module . . . . . 3-27
Figure 3-17 2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Figure 3-18 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Figure 3-19 3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Figure 3-20 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Figure 3-23 10/100BaseT ECM with 24-port 10/100BaseTX Ports . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Figure 3-24 10/100BaseT ECM with 16-port 10/100BaseTX Ports . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Figure 3-25 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Figure 3-26 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Figure 3-27 Fiber Optic Module (viewed from the right side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-28 MPX Connector Mapping for the 1- and 4- Port Modules, and
the GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-52
Figure 3-29 MPX Connector Mapping for 8-port Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53
Figure 3-30 MPX Connector Mapping for the GbE plus 100BaseFX Module . 3-53
Figure 3-31 Traverse 1600 Fiber Optic Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-58
Figure 3-32 Traverse 2000 Fiber Optic Backplane. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
Figure 3-33 Fiber Cable Management Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62
Figure 3-34 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-63
Figure 3-35 Replace Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-64
List of Tables
Table 3-1 Electrical Connector Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Table 3-2 Traverse 1600 DS1 Cabling Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-3 Traverse 2000 DS1 Cabling Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Table 3-4 Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Table 3-5 DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Table 3-6 DS1 Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Table 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Table 3-8 Traverse 1600 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Table 3-9 Traverse 2000 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Table 3-10 Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Table 3-11 DS3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Table 3-12 DS3 Panel Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Table 3-13 Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module. . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Table 3-14 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module . . . . . 3-42
Table 3-15 24-port 10/100BaseTX and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/ Color Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-45
Table 3-16 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One) . . . . . . . . . 3-47


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) . . . . . . . . . 3-48
Table 3-18 Color Code for 1-Port Fiber Optic Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Table 3-19 Color Code 2-Port GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Module . . . . 3-55
Table 3-22 Color Code for 2-Port GbE (Connector A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Table 3-23 Color Code for 8-port 100BaseFX (Connector B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-57
Table 3-24 Fiber Optic Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61

Chapter 1
Electrical Connector Module Descriptions
Introduction There are five types of electrical connector modules (ECM) used for copper and coax
cabling at the Traverse main backplane:
■ 2-slot-wide DS1/E1 (Telco 64).
■ 2-slot-wide DS3/E3 (24 BNC).
■ 2-slot-wide 10/100BaseT (Telco 50).
■ 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (48 BNC).
■ 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB).
The electrical connector modules enable copper and coax network interface cabling
using industry-standard cables and connectors.
DS1/E1 ECM DS3/E3 ECM 10/100BaseT ECM DS3/E3 ECM DS3/E3 ECM
(Telco 64) (24 BNC) (Telco 50) (48 BNC) (96 Mini-SMB)
Figure 3-1 Electrical Connector Modules (Front View)

Volume 2, Section 3: Network Interface Cabling
ECM Placement at the Traverse Main Backplane
ECM The ECMs plug into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any corresponding odd or
Placement at even slot1. The 2-slot ECM occupies the width of two slots and the 3-slot ECM
the Traverse occupies the width of three slots on the main backplane. For example, the 2-slot ECM
Main for slots 1 and 2 plugs into the 2 mm connectors of slot 1. The following graphic shows
Backplane slot 1 main backplane 2 mm connectors in dark grey, and the outline of the 2-slot ECM
in light grey.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot 1
Connectors
Figure 3-2 2-Slot ECM Placement—Traverse 2000 Main Backplane
1
Refer to pre-Release 1.3 Traverse system documentation for placement restrictions with respect to the
superseded Traverse backplane design supporting only 1:1 protection schemes. The protection module
must be in the odd-numbered slot and the working module in the even-numbered slot.

Chapter 1 Electrical Connector Module Descriptions
ECM and Module Placement Planning Guidelines
ECM and Since ECMs are two and three slots in width and different protection schemes, the
Module following guidelines apply for module placement planning and cabling:
Placement 1. 1:2 equipment protection module placement.
Planning – Using a 3-slot DS3/E3 ECM, place like modules (12- or 24-port DS3/E3/EC-1
Guidelines CC)2 in any three adjacent slots. The protection group can start in any odd or
even slot. The module in the center slot is the protection module for the
working modules in the two adjacent slots.
or
– Using a 2-slot DS1/E1 ECM, place like modules (DS1) in any three adjacent
slots. The protection group can start in any odd or even slot. The module in the
center slot is the protection module for the working modules in the two
adjacent slots.
2. 1:1 equipment protection module placement.
Using a 2-slot DS1/E1 or DS3/E3 ECM, place like modules (DS1, DS3/EC-1 CC,
DS3/EC-1 TMUX, 12- or 24-port DS3/E3/EC-1 CC) in any two adjacent slots. The
protection group can start in any odd or even slot3. The module in the left-most slot
is the protection module for the working module in the right-adjacent slot.
3. Unprotected module placement
– Using a 2-slot DS1/E1 or 10/100BaseTX ECM, place two like
copper-interface modules (DS1 or 10/100BaseTX) in adjacent slots and
connect cables to the ECM for both modules.
or
– Using a 3-slot DS3/E3 ECM, place two like copper-interface modules (12- or
24-port DS3/E3/EC-1 CC) in the left- and right-most slots and an optical
module (OC-3, OC-12 or OC-48) in the center slot and connect the
copper-interface cables to the ECM accordingly.
or
– Using any of the 2-slot ECMs, place a DS1, DS3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1 TMUX
or 10/100BaseTX module in one slot and an optical module (OC-3, OC-12 or
OC-48) in the other slot and connect the copper-interface cables to the ECM
accordingly.
2
The pre-Release 1.4 DS3/EC-1 CC and DS3/EC-1 TMUX modules are not used in the 1:2 protection
group.
3
Refer to pre-Release 1.3 Traverse system documentation for placement restrictions with respect to the
superseded Traverse backplane design supporting only 1:1 protection schemes. The protection module
must be in the odd-numbered slot and the working module in the even-numbered slot.

Electrical Connection Module Types
Electrical The following table provides port, connector and cable information for each type of
Connection ECM. The total number of ports supported for each ECM is based on like modules
Module Types placed adjacently in the shelf.
Table 3-1 Electrical Connector Modules
Total # of Ports
Type of EMC
ECM Type 1:2 1:1 Cable Description
Connectors
Equipment Equipment Unprotected
Protection Protection
DS1/E1
56 28 56
(DS1 ports) (4) female Telco 64 Copper 32-pair cable, 24 AWG,
(CHAMP) with 180º male Telco 64
DS1/E1 connector.
42 21 42
(E1 ports)
(24) female 75Ω BNC Coax, AT&T 734A or 735A

DS3/E3, 2-slot
N/A 12 12 equivalent, with male BNC
(24 BNC)
connector.
(48) female 75Ω BNC Coax, AT&T 734A or 735A

DS3/E3, 3-slot
24 12 24 equivalent, with male BNC
(48 BNC)
connector.
DS3/E3, 3-slot (96) female 75Ω Coax, AT&T 735A equivalent,

48 24 48
(96 Mini-SMB) Mini-SMB with male Mini-SMB connector.
(4) female Telco 50 Copper, 25-pair category 5

10/100BaseT N/A N/A 48 (Centronics) cable, with 180º male Telco 50
connector.
Network Please refer to the following chapters in Section 3—Network Interface Cabling for
Interface detailed information regarding network interface cabling using electrical connector
Cabling using modules:
ECMs ■ Chapter 2—“DS1 Cabling,” page 3-5.
■ Chapter 3—“DS3 Cabling,” page 3-19.
■ Chapter 4—“10/100BaseTX Cabling,” page 3-35.

Chapter 2
DS1 Cabling
Introduction The Traverse main backplane supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection switching and
cabling for 28-port DS1 modules using the DS1/E1 electrical connector module
(ECM)1.
This chapter provides the following information on DS1 protected and unprotected
cabling and step-by-step instructions on how to complete cabling at the Traverse 1600
and Traverse 2000 main backplane using an DS1/E1 ECM.
■ DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module Placement, page 3-6.
■ DS1 Module Cabling Schemes, page 3-8.
■ DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module, page 3-9.
■ Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module, page 3-12.
■ DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 3-13.
■ DS1 Panel Cabling, page 3-16.
■ DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes, page 3-17.
1
E1 refers to a ETSI (SDH) module. Please refer to the Traverse System SDH Documentation set for
information.

DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module Placement
DS1/E1 DS1/E1 ECMs allow DS1 cabling using industry-standard twisted-pair copper cable
Electrical with Telco 64 connectors or Turin Telco 64 cable assembly. The DS1/E1 ECM has four
Connector Telco 64 connectors on the front side and two 2 mm type B connectors on the back
Module side.
Placement The DS1/E1 ECM plugs into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any
corresponding odd or even slot. The 2-slot DS1/E1 ECM design provides direct cable
access to one (n+1) or two (n and n+1 or n and n+2) modules (depending on the
protection cabling scheme used) and occupies the width of two slots on the main
backplane. Plug the DS1/E1 ECM into the 2 mm connectors of the corresponding
protection slot. This is the right-most slot (n) for both unprotected and 1:1 equipment
protection schemes, and the center slot (n+1) for 1:2 equipment protection (when
viewed from the back of the shelf).
2-Slot ECM. For example, the ECM for slots 1 and 2 plugs into the 2 mm connectors
for slot number 1 (n=1). Main backplane 2 mm connectors are shown in dark grey, and
the outline of the 2-slot ECM for slots 1 and 2 is shown in light grey in the following
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 graphics.
n+1 n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors
Figure 3-3 2-Slot ECM Plugged into Traverse 1600 Main Backplane

Chapter 2 DS1 Cabling
n+1 n
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors

DS1 Module Cabling Schemes
DS1 Module The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2
Cabling equipment protection and unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment
Schemes protection groups can start in any odd or even slot.
Refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and
Guidelines,” page 7-1 for further module placement guidelines and restrictions.
Note: The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes support DS1 protected
and unprotected slots and ports simultaneously.
Table 3-2 Traverse 1600 DS1 Cabling Scheme
Maximum Total # of Total # of

Module Cabling Comments
Protection Working Slots
Type Scheme (Front Shelf Perspective)
Groups Ports (In Use)
DS1 (28-port) 1:2 protection 4 224 12 Center module protects left and
right-adjacent modules.
1:1 protection 6 168 12 Left-most module protects

right-adjacent module.
Unprotected N/A 336 12 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct cable

access to both modules.
Table 3-3 Traverse 2000 DS1 Cabling Scheme
Maximum Total # of Total # of

Module Cabling Comments
Protection Working Slots
Type Scheme (Front Shelf Perspective)
Groups Ports (In Use)
DS1 (28-port) 1:2 protection 5 280 15 Center module protects left and
right-adjacent modules.
1:1 protection 8 224 16 Left-most module protects

right-adjacent module.
Unprotected N/A 448 16 DS1/E1 ECM provides direct cable

access to both modules.

DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module
DS1/E1 The DS1/E1 ECM supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection and unprotected cabling
Electrical schemes. The 2-slot DS1/E1 ECM design provides direct cable access to one (n+1) or
Connector two (n and n+1 or n and n+2) modules (depending on the protection cabling scheme
Module used) and occupies the width of two slots on the main backplane. The following
graphics show the DS1/E1 ECM connectors used for the three cabling schemes.
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM connectors used for 1:1 equipment
protection cabling.
Input (I) Connector for
DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n+1
Top 2 (I and O)
Output (O) Connector for Connectors are used
DS1 Ports 1–28 for 1:1 Protection
of Slot n+1 Cabling
Note: Plug the DS1/E1

ECM into Slot n 2 mm
main backplane
connectors
Figure 3-5 DS1/E1 ECM—1:1 Protection Connectors

DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM connectors used for 1:2 equipment
protection cabling.

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n+2
Output (O) Connector for

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n+2
Top and Bottom

4 (2-I and 2-O)
Connectors are used for
1:2 Protection Cabling

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n

Note: Plug the DS1/E1 DS1 Ports 1–28
ECM into Slot n+1 of Slot n
2 mm main backplane
connectors
Figure 3-6 DS1/E1 ECM—1:2 Protection Connectors
The following graphic shows the DS1/E1 ECM connectors used for unprotected
cabling.

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n+1

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n+1
Top and Bottom

4 (2-I and 2-O)
Connectors are used for
Unprotected Cabling

DS1 Ports 1–28
of Slot n

Note: Plug the DS1/E1 DS1 Ports 1–28
ECM into Slot n 2 mm of Slot n
main backplane
connectors
Figure 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM —Unprotected Connectors

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make DS1 cable connections at the
Equipment and electrical connector modules, an optional DS1 intermediate patch panel and/or to the
Tools central office DSX cross-connect panel:
■ DS1/E1 electrical connector module(s). One electrical connector module (ECM) is
required for one working and one protection module, or two unprotected modules.
■ Cable(s).
Important: Turin Networks manufactures a Turin Telco 64 cable

assembly for DS1 cabling with electrical connector modules (EMCs). The
Turin Telco 64 cable assembly provides additional shielding and passes all
requirements for Telcordia NEBS, FCC Class B and ETSI Class B
electromagnetic interference (EMI) testing.
Industry-standard 32-pair, 24 ASG cable with a 180º Telco 64 male
connector may be used as an option to the Turin Telco 64 cable assembly;
however, these cables may not meet Telcordia, FCC and ETSI EMI test
requirements.
– 50- or 75-foot Turin Telco 64 cable assembly. One cable assembly is required
for each ECM2 for 1:1 equipment protection, two cable assemblies are required
per ECM for unprotected cabling.
or
– Standard 32 pair, 24 AWG cable with 180º 64 position male Telco 64
(CHAMP) connector at one end. Two cables are required per ECM for 1:1
equipment protection, four cables are required per ECM for unprotected
cabling.
■ Large flat-blade screwdriver.
■ Small flat-blade screwdriver.
■ An optional DS1 intermediate patch panel.
■ Punchdown tool to terminate DS1 cabling at an optional intermediate patch panel
and/or central office DSX cross-connect panel.
2
The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly has male Telco 64 connectors at both ends. The cable assembly is cut
in half and used to connect to the two Telco 64 connectors on the ECM. The other end is punched down
at the optional DS1 intermediate patch panel or at the DSX cross-connect panel.

Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module
Plug-in DS1/E1 DS1/E1 ECMs plug into two (upper and lower) 2 mm connectors of the corresponding
Electrical odd or even slot on the Traverse main backplane.
Connector
Module
(ESD) wrist strap when making connections to the Traverse main
backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in DS1/E1 ECMs:
Table 3-4 Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are DS1/E1 electrical connector modules plugged into the main

backplane?
■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, DS1 Cabling at the Electrical
Connector Module.
2 The Traverse shelf may have blank back covers in place over the 2 mm
connectors on main backplane. Remove the blank back covers from the
Traverse shelf as required for placement of ECMs. Please refer to
Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 2—“Removing
and Replacing Back Covers,” page 1-8 for detailed instructions.
3 Line up the DS1/E1 ECM with two 2 mm connectors (upper and lower) of
the corresponding odd or even (“protecting”) slot on the main backplane.
Note: The protecting slot is the right-most slot for unprotected and 1:1
protection, and the center slot for 1:2 protection (when viewed from the
back of the shelf). Refer to DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module
Placement on page 3-6.
4 Push straight in on the ECM until firmly in place.
5 Secure the ECM by tightening the two spring-loaded screws using a
flat-blade screwdriver.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each DS1/E1 ECM as required.
7 The Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module procedure is complete.

DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
DS1 Cabling at DS1 cables are connected to the DS1/E1 ECM and then terminated at an intermediate
the Electrical DS1 patch panel and/or directly to the central office DSX cross-connect panel.
Connector
Module
(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections.
Important: If an intermediate DS1 patch panel is used it must be

properly grounded in a equipment rack.
Follow these steps to make DS1 cable connections at the DS1/E1 electrical connector
module:
Table 3-5 DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Connect the DS1 cables with male Telco 64 connectors into the DS1/E1
ECM based on the cabling scheme:
■ 1:1 protection, see Figure 3-5 DS1/E1 ECM—1:1 Protection
Connectors, page 3-9.
■ 1:2 protection, see Figure 3-6 DS1/E1 ECM—1:2 Protection
■ Unprotected, see Figure 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM—Unprotected
Note: Refer to Table 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes on page 3-17 for detailed information.
2 Tighten screws on Telco 64 connectors to secure cables to the ECM.

Table 3-5 DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Important: The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly has a drain wire. Connect
the drain wire to the DS1/E1 ECM drain wire stud.
Drain Wire Stud
Figure 3-8 DS1/E1 ECM Drain Wire Stud
4 Label DS1 cables output (O) and input (I) following local procedures.
5 Provide enough slack in the cables and bring them out the right side of the
shelf.
6 Repeat Steps 1–5 for cabling at each DS1/E1 ECM.
7 Tie-wrap cables to the cable management bar following local procedures.
Cable
Management
Bar
DS1 Cables to
the Right Side
Figure 3-9 Traverse Shelf with Cable Management Bar

Step Procedure
8 Is an intermediate DS1 patch panel installed in an equipment rack for

termination of the DS1 cables?
■ If yes, route the cables to the intermediate patch panel located in the
same or adjacent rack per local procedures.
■ If no, route the cables up the rack rails to the horizontal cable racks
and over to the central office DSX cross-connect panel per local
procedures.
9 Cut DS1 cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
10 Important: The Turin Telco 64 cable assembly is shielded. Connect a
ground wire to the shielding. Connect the ground wire to the equipment
rack following local procedures.
11 Use a punchdown tool to terminate DS1 cables at the intermediate patch
panel or DSX cross-connect panel.
Note: Each working 28-port DS1 module requires 28 output, and 28
input terminations at an intermediate patch panel or central office DSX
cross-connect panel.
12 Did you terminate the DS1 cables at the central office DSX cross-connect
panel?
■ If yes, the DS1 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module procedure
is complete.
■ If no, and DS1 cables were terminated at a intermediate patch panel,
continue to the next procedure, DS1 Cabling.

DS1 Panel Cabling
DS1 Panel Follow these steps to make the connection at an intermediate DS1 patch panel and the
Cabling central office DSX cross-connect panel:
Table 3-6 DS1 Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) DS1 cables to the intermediate DS1
patch panel using a punchdown tool.
Note: Each working 28-port DS1 module requires 28 output and 28 input
connections at the patch panel (for each DS1 cable terminated) and at the
DSX cross-connect panel.
2 Label the cables to designate Output and Input per local procedures.
3 Route the cables from the patch panel across the horizontal cable rack to
the DSX cross-connect panel, per local procedures.
4 Cut the cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
5 Terminate Output and Input cables on the DSX cross-connect panel using
a punchdown tool.
6 Repeat Step 1 through 5 for each DS1 cable terminated at an
intermediate DS1 patch panel.
7 The DS1 Cabling is complete.

DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes
DS1/E1 ECM The following table provides DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 connector pinouts and DS1 cable
Telco 64 color codes. There are four Telco 64 connectors on an ECM. The top two connectors
Connector are used for 1:1 protection cabling. All four connectors are used for 1:2 protection and
Pinouts and unprotected cabling. Refer to DS1/E1 Electrical Connector Module, page 3-9 for
Cable Color DS1/E1 ECM layout.
Codes
Table 3-7 DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and
Cable Color Codes
Ring Tip
DS1 Modules
Telco 64 Cable Telco 64 Cable
Pins 1–28 Color Code Pins 33–60 Color Code
Port 1/Channel 1/Pair 1 1 Blue/White 33 White/Blue
Port 2/ Channel 2/Pair 2 2 Orange/White 34 White/Orange
Port 3/ Channel 3/Pair 3 3 Green/White 35 White/Green
Port 4/ Channel 4/Pair 4 4 Brown/White 36 White/Brown
Port 5/Channel 5/Pair 5 5 Slate/White 37 White/Slate
Port 6/Channel 6/Pair 6 6 Blue/Red 38 Red/Blue
Port 7/Channel 7/Pair 7 7 Orange/Red 39 Red/Orange
Port 8/Channel 8/Pair 8 8 Green/Red 40 Red/Green
Port 9/Channel 9/Pair 9 9 Brown/Red 41 Red/Brown
Port 10/Channel 10/Pair 10 10 Slate/Red 42 Red/Slate
Port 11/Channel 11/Pair 11 11 Blue/Black 43 Black/Blue
Port 12/Channel 12/Pair 12 12 Orange/Black 44 Black/Orange
Port 13/Channel 13/Pair 13 13 Green/Black 45 Black/Green
Port 14/Channel 14/Pair 14 14 Brown/Black 46 Black/Brown
Port 15/Channel 15/Pair 15 15 Slate/Black 47 Black/Slate
Port 16/Channel 16/Pair 16 16 Blue/Yellow 48 Yellow/Blue
Port 17/Channel 17/Pair 17 17 Orange/Yellow 49 Yellow/Orange
Port 18/Channel 18/Pair 17 18 Green/Yellow 50 Yellow/Green
Port 19/Channel 19/Pair 19 19 Brown/Yellow 51 Yellow/Brown
Port 20/Channel 20/Pair 20 20 Slate/Yellow 52 Yellow/Slate
Port 21/Channel 21/Pair 21 21 Blue/Violet 53 Violet/Blue
Port 22/Channel 22/Pair 22 22 Orange/Violet 54 Violet/Orange
Port 23/Channel 23/Pair 23 23 Green/Violet 55 Violet/Green
Port 24/Channel 24/Pair 24 24 Brown/Violet 56 Violet/Brown
Port 25/Channel 25/Pair 25 25 Slate/Violet 57 Violet/Slate
Port 26/Channel 26/Pair 26 26 Blue/White 58 White/Blue
Port 27/Channel 27/Pair 27 27 Orange/White 59 White/Orange
Port 28/Channel 28/Pair 28 28 Green/White 60 White/Green

DS1/E1 ECM Telco 64 Connector Pinouts and Cable Color Codes

Chapter 3
DS3 Cabling
cabling for 12 and 24-port DS3/EC-1 modules1 using DS3/E3 electrical connector
modules (ECM)2. The three DS3/E3 ECM types are as follows:
■ 2-slot-wide DS3/E3 (24 BNC) for 12-port DS3/EC-1 modules and 1:1 protection.
■ 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (48 BNC) for 12-port DS3/EC-1 modules and 1:2 protection.
■ 3-slot-wide DS3/E3 (96 mini-SMB) for 24-port DS3/EC-1 modules and 1:2
protection.
This chapter provides the following information on DS3 protected and unprotected
cabling and step-by-step instructions on how to complete cabling at the Traverse main
backplane using the DS3/E3 ECM.
■ DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module Placement, page 3-20.
■ Traverse 1600 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes, page 3-23.
■ Traverse 2000 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes, page 3-24.
■ 2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) Electrical Connector Module, page 3-25.
■ 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) Electrical Connector Module, page 3-26.
■ 3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) Electrical Connector Module, page 3-27.
■ Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module, page 3-29.
■ DS3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 3-30.
■ DS3 Panel Cabling, page 3-34.
1
Release 1.4 introduces new 12 and 24-port DS3/EC-1 modules to support the 1:2 equipment protection
feature.
2
E3 refers to an ETSI (SDH) module. Please refer to the Traverse System SDH Documentation set for
information.

DS3/E3 DS3/E3 ECMs allow DS3 cabling using industry-standard coax cable (AT&T 734A or
Electrical 735A equivalent) with male 75Ω BNC or Mini-SMB connectors on the front side and
Connector two 2 mm type B connectors on the back side.
Module The DS3/E3 ECM plugs into the main backplane 2 mm connectors of any
Placement corresponding odd or even slot. The 2-slot DS3/E3 ECM design provides direct cable
access to one module (n+1) and occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the main
backplane. The 3-slot DS3/E3 ECM design provides direct cable access to two modules
(n and n+2) and occupies the width of three slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on the main
backplane. Plug the ECM into the right-most (n) 2 mm connectors for 2-slot ECMs and
the center (n+1) 2 mm connectors for 3-slot ECMs (when viewed from the back of the
shelf).
n+1 n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors

n+1 n
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors
3-Slot ECM. For example, the ECM for slots 1, 2, and 3 plugs into the 2 mm
connectors for the center slot (n+1=2). Main backplane 2 mm connectors are shown in
dark grey, and the outline of the 3-slot ECM for slots 1, 2, and 3 is shown in light grey
in the following Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 graphics.
n+2 n+1 n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3-slot ECM
Slot n+1=2
Connectors

n+2 n+1 n
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3-slot ECM
Slot n+1=2
Connectors

Traverse 1600 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes
Traverse 1600 The Traverse 1600 main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection
DS3 Module and unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can
Cabling start in any odd or even slot.
Schemes Refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and
Table 3-8 Traverse 1600 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes
Maximum Total #
DS3 Total #
Cabling ECM Protection of Comments
Module of Slots
Scheme Type Groups Working (Front Shelf Perspective)
Type (In Use)
(PG) Ports
12-port 1:2 protection 3-slot 4 96 12 Center module protects left and

DS3/E3 right-adjacent modules.
(48 BNC)
1:1 protection 48 8 The left-most slot is open in this
configuration. Do one of the following:
■ Leave open for future upgrade to
1:2 protection.
■ Place an optic module in the
left-most slot.
2-slot 6 72 12 Left-most module protects

DS3/E3 right-adjacent module.
(24 BNC)
Unprotected 3-slot N/A 96 8 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the left- and
(48 BNC) right-most modules so place an optic
module in the center slot.
2-slot 72 6 2-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the right-most
(24 BNC) module so place an optic module in the
left-most slot.
24-port 1:2 protection 3-slot 4 192 12 Center module protects left- and
(96 Mini-
1:1 protection SMB) 96 8 The left-most slot is open in this
1:2 protection.
left-most slot.
Unprotected N/A 192 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

cable access to only the left- and
right-most modules so place an optic

Traverse 2000 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes
Traverse 2000 The Traverse 2000 main backplane design supports 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection
DS3 Module and unprotected cabling schemes. Both 1:1 and 1:2 equipment protection groups can
Cabling start in any odd or even slot.
Schemes Refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and
Table 3-9 Traverse 2000 DS3 Module Cabling Schemes
Maximum Total #
DS3 Total #
Cabling ECM Protection of Comments
Module of Slots
Scheme Type Groups Working (Front Shelf Perspective)
Type (In Use)
(PG) Ports
(48 BNC)
1:1 protection 60 10 The left-most slot is open in this
1:2 protection.
left-most slot.
2-slot 8 96 16 Left-most module protects

DS3/E3 right-adjacent module.
(24 BNC)
Unprotected 3-slot N/A 120 10 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the left- and
(48 BNC) right-most modules so place an optic
2-slot 96 8 2-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

DS3/E3 cable access to only the right-most
(24 BNC) module so place an optic module in the
left-most slot.
(96 Mini-
1:1 protection SMB) 120 10 The left-most slot is left open in this
■ Place an optic module in the center
slot.
1:2 protection.
Unprotected N/A 240 3-slot DS3/E3 ECMs provide direct

cable access to only the left- and
right-most modules so place an optic

2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) Electrical Connector Module
2-Slot DS3/E3 The 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM design provides direct cable access to one module
(24 BNC) (n+1) and occupies the width of two slots (n and n+1) on the main backplane. The
Electrical following graphic shows the 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM and input (I) and output
Connector (O) BNC connector locations to support one 12-port DS3/EC-1 module and 1:1
Module protection.
Input (I) Output (O)

BNC Connectors for BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1 Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1
Figure 3-14 2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) Electrical Connector Module

3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) Electrical Connector Module
3-Slot DS3/E3 The 3-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM design provides direct cable access to two modules
(48 BNC) (n and n+2) and occupies the width of three slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on the main
Electrical backplane. The following graphic shows the 3-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM and input
Connector (I) and output (O) BNC connector locations to support two 12-port DS3/EC-1 modules
Module and 1:2 protection.
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n+2
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Figure 3-15 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) Electrical Connector Module

3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) Electrical Connector Module
3-Slot DS3/E3 The 3-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) ECM design provides direct cable access to two
(96 Mini-SMB) modules (n and n+2) and occupies the width of three adjacent slots (n, n+1, and n+2) on
Electrical the main backplane. The following graphic shows the 3-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB)
Connector ECM and input (I) and output (O) Mini-SMB connector locations to support two
Module 24-port DS3/EC-1 modules and 1:2 protection.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 3-16 3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) Electrical Connector Module

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make DS3 cable connections at the
Equipment and ECMs, an optional DS3 intermediate patch panel, and/or to the central office DSX-3
Tools cross-connect panel:
■ 2-slot and/or 3-slot ECMs:
– 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM(s). One ECM is required for the pair of 12-port
DS3/E3 modules (1 working and 1 protecting) in a 1:1 protection group.
– 3-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM(s). One ECM is required for the triad of 12-port
DS3/EC-1 modules (2 working and 1 protecting) in a 1:2 protection group.
– 3-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) ECM(s). One ECM is required for the triad of
24-port DS3/EC-1 modules (2 working and 1 protecting) in a 1:2 protection
group.
■ AT&T 734A or 735A equivalent coax cable with male 75Ω BNC or Mini-SMB
connectors.
– 24 (75Ω BNC) cables are required per 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM for 1:1
equipment protection.
– 48 (75Ω BNC) cables are required per 2-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM for 1:2
equipment protection.
– 96 (75Ω Mini-SMB) cables are required per 2-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB)
ECM for 1:2 equipment protection.
■ An optional DS3 intermediate patch panel.
■ The following items are required to make connections at the patch panel and/or
DSX-3 cross-connect panel:
– AT&T 734A or 735A equivalent cable.
– 75Ω BNC socket connectors.
– 75Ω Mini-SMB socket connectors.
– Diagonal cutters.
– Coax center crimp tool.
– Coax cable stripping tool.
– Coax crimp tool.

Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module
Plug-in DS3/E3 DS3/E3 ECMs plug into the two (upper and lower) 2 mm connectors of the
Electrical corresponding odd or even slot on the Traverse main backplane.
Connector
Module
backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in DS3/E3 ECMs.
Table 3-10 Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are DS3/E3 ECMs plugged into the main backplane?

■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, DS3 Cabling at the Electrical
Connector Module.
3 Line up the DS3/E3 ECM with the 2 mm connectors (upper and lower) of
the corresponding odd or even (“protecting”) slot on the main backplane.
Note: The protecting slot is the right-most slot for 2-slot ECMs and the
center slot for 3-slot ECMs (when viewed from the back of the shelf).
Refer to DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module Placement on page 3-20.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each DS3/E3 ECM as required.
7 The Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical Connector Module procedure is complete.

DS3 Cabling at DS3 cables are connected to the ECM and then terminated at an intermediate DS3
the Electrical patch panel and/or directly to the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.
Connector
Module
Important: If an intermediate DS3 patch panel is used, it must be

properly grounded in an equipment rack.
Follow these steps to make DS3 cable connections at the DS3/E3 ECM.
Table 3-11 DS3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 The ECM to connect to is a:

■ 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC), go to Step 2.
■ 3-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC), go to Step 3.
■ 3-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB), go to Step 4.
2 Connect the 12-port DS3 module cables with 75Ω BNC connectors into
the ECM connectors. A total of 24 (12 input and 12 output) coax cables are
required for each 2-slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM.
Input (I) Output (O)

BNC Connectors for BNC Connectors for
Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1 Ports 1–12 of Slot n+1
Figure 3-17 2-Slot DS3/E3 (24 BNC) ECM Connectors

Step Procedure
3 Connect the 12-port DS3 module cables with 75Ω BNC connectors into
the ECM connector. A total of 48 (2x12 input and 2x12 output) coax
cables are required for each 3-slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM.
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Input (I)
BNC Connectors for
Output (O)
BNC Connectors for
Figure 3-18 3-Slot DS3/E3 (48 BNC) ECM Connectors

Step Procedure
4 Connect the 24-port DS3 module cables with 75Ω Mini-SMB connectors
into the ECM connector. A total of 96 (2x24 input and 2x24 output) coax
cables are required for each 3-slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) ECM.
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Input (I)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Output (O)
Mini-SMB Connectors
for
Figure 3-19 3-Slot DS3/E3 (96 Mini-SMB) ECM Connectors
5 Label DS3 coax cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 12 or

24_OUT) and Input (1_IN through 12 or 24_IN) following local
procedures.
shelf.
7 Repeat Steps 1–6 for cabling at each DS3/E3 ECM.

Step Procedure
Cable
Management
Bar
DS3 Cables to
the Right Side
9 Is an intermediate DS3 patch panel installed in an equipment rack for

termination of the DS3 cables?
■ If yes, route the cables to the intermediate patch panel located in the
same or adjacent rack per local procedures.
■ If no, route the cables up the rack rails to the horizontal cable racks
and over to the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel per local
procedures.
10 Cut DS3 cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
Important: DS3 coax cable length, from the Traverse shelf to the
intermediate patch panel or DSX-3 cross-connect panel, must not exceed
450 feet to meet pulse template requirements.
11 Strip and terminate connectors on the cables using a coax stripping tool
and crimp tool.
12 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables on intermediate patch
panel or central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.
13 Did you terminate the DS3 cables at the central office DSX-3
cross-connect panel?
■ If yes, the DS3 Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module procedure
is complete.
■ If no, and DS3 cables were terminated at an intermediate patch panel,
continue to the next procedure, DS3 Panel Cabling.

DS3 Panel Cabling
DS3 Panel Follow these steps to make cable connections from an intermediate DS3 patch panel to
Cabling the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel.
Table 3-12 DS3 Panel Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Terminate Output (O) and Input (I) coax cables to the intermediate DS3
patch panel using 75Ω BNC or Mini-SMB connectors.
2 Label the cables to designate Output (1_OUT through 12 or 24_OUT) and
Input (1_IN through 12 or 24_IN) per local procedures.
3 Route the cables from the patch panel across the horizontal cable rack to
the central office DSX-3 cross-connect panel, per local procedures.
4 Cut the cables to the correct length using diagonal cutters.
5 Strip and terminate connectors on the cables using a coax stripping tool
and crimp tool.
6 Terminate Output and Input cables on the DSX-3 cross-connect panel
using 75Ω BNC or Mini-SMB connectors.
7 Repeat Step 1 through 6 for each DS3 cable terminated at an
intermediate DS3 patch panel.
8 The DS3 Panel Cabling procedure is complete.

Chapter 4
10/100BaseTX Cabling
cabling for the 24-port 10/100BaseTX, the 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo, and the 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo modules.1
This chapter provides the following information and step-by-step instructions on how
to complete cabling at the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplane using a
10/100BaseT electrical connector module (ECM).
■ 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module Placement, page 3-36.
■ 10/100BaseTX Unprotected Cabling, page 3-37.
■ 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module, page 3-38.
■ Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module, page 3-41.
■ 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 3-42.
■ 24-port 10/100BaseTX Pinouts and Cable Color Code, page 3-45.
■ 2-port GbE plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo Pinouts and Cable Color
Code, page 3-47.
1
The 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo modules require fiber optic and twisted-pair copper cabling. Please refer to Section 3—Network
Interface Cabling, Chapter 5—“Fiber Optic Cabling,” page 3-51 for fiber optic cabling information.

10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module Placement
10/100BaseT The 10/100BaseT ECM allows 10/100BaseTX cabling using category 5 twisted-pair
Electrical copper cable with Telco 50 connectors. The 10/100BaseT ECM has four Telco 50
Connector connectors on the front side and two 2 mm type B connectors on the back side.
Module The 10/100BaseT ECM plugs into the main backplane two 2 mm connectors of any
Placement odd or even slot. The electrical connector module is two slots in width, but plugs into
the two right-most connectors (as viewed from the back of the shelf).
n+1 n
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors

Chapter 4 10/100BaseTX Cabling
10/100BaseTX Unprotected Cabling
n+1 n
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
2-slot ECM
Slot n=1
Connectors
10/100BaseTX The 24-port 10/100BaseTX, 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo, and
Unprotected 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo modules are not protected. The
Cabling 10/100BaseT ECM supports 10/100BaseTX unprotected cabling only.

10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
10/100BaseT The following graphic shows the 10/100BaseT ECM for the 24-port 10/100BaseTX
Electrical module with Telco 50 connector locations for ports 1–12 and 13– 24 of slots n and n+1.
Connector
Module
Ports 1–12
(Slot n+1)
Ports 13–24
(Slot n+1)
Ports 1–12
(Slot n)
Ports 13–24
(Slot n)
Figure 3-23 10/100BaseT ECM with 24-port 10/100BaseTX Ports

10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Ports 1 and 2 on the 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 2-port
GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo modules are optical ports. Ports 3–18 are
the electrical interface ports. The 16 electrical ports are connected as follows:
■ Ports 3–6 are connected to the first Telco 50 connector (labeled PORTS 1 - 12).
■ Ports 7–18 are connected to the second Telco 50 connector (labeled PORTS
13–24).
The following graphic shows the 10/100BaseT ECM for the 2-port GbE LX plus
16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo
modules with Telco 50 connector 1 (ports 3–6) and Telco 50 connector 2 (ports 7– 18)
for slots n and n+1.
Connector 1
Ports 3–6
(Slot n+1#)
Connector 2
Ports 7–18
(Slot n+1)
Connector 1
Ports 3–6
(Slot n)
Connector 2
Ports 7–18
(Slot n)
Figure 3-24 10/100BaseT ECM with 16-port 10/100BaseTX Ports

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make 10/100BaseTX cable
Equipment and connections at the electrical connector modules and 10/100BaseT intermediate patch
Tools panel:
■ 10/100BaseT electrical connector module(s).
Note: One electrical connector module (ECM) supports two 24-port 10/100BaseTX
modules, two 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo, or two 2-port GbE
SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo modules.
■ Cable(s).
Important: Turin manufactures a Turin Telco 50 cable assembly for

10/100BaseTX cabling with electrical connector modules (ECMs). The
Turin Telco 50 cable assembly provides additional shielding and passes all
requirements for Telcordia NEBS, FCC Class B and ETSI Class B EMI
testing.
Industry-standard 25-pair, category 5 cable with a 180º Telco 50 male
connector may be used as an option to the Turin Telco 50 cable assembly;
however, these cables may not meet all Telcordia, FCC and ETSI EMI test
requirements.
– Standard 25 pair, category 5 cables with 180º 50 position male Telco 50

(CHAMP) connector at one end. Four cables are required per ECM.
or
– 25, 50, or 75-foot Turin Telco 50 cable assemblies. Two cable assemblies are
required per ECM2.
■ One clamp-on ferrite (Turin part number 499-0135) per cable.
■ Small flat-blade screwdriver.
■ 10/100BaseT intermediate patch panel3.
■ Tools to terminate 10/100BaseTX cabling at an intermediate patch panel.
– Punchdown tool.
or
– RJ-45 crimp tool, cutter and RJ-45 plugs.
2
The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly has male Telco 50 connectors at both ends. The cable assembly is cut
in half and used to connect to the two Telco 50 connectors on the ECM. The other end is punched down
at the intermediate patch panel or terminated on RJ-45 connectors.
3
Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for termination of fiber optic cables (SC duplex
module) and Category 5 cables (RJ-45). This patch panel is used for the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and 2-port GbE SX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo modules. It
provides flexibility and better identification of fiber optic and copper pairs terminated at the intermediate
patch panel. Turin part number 950-0070-00 (2-port SC Duplex Adapter, 16-port 10/100 Ethernet
Category 5 Module).

Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Plug-in 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules are plugged into two 2 mm connectors on
10/100BaseT the Traverse main backplane.
Electrical
Connector
Module backplane.
Follow these steps to plug-in 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules.
Table 3-13 Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Are 10/100BaseT electrical connector modules plugged into the main

backplane?
■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the
Electrical Connector Module.
3 Line up a 10/100BaseT electrical connector module with two 2 mm
connectors on the main backplane.
Note: The ECM is placed in the right-most connectors (as viewed from
the back of the shelf). Refer to 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector
Module Placement on page 3-36.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 5 for each electrical connector module as required.
7 The Plug-in 10/100BaseT Electrical Connector Module procedure is
complete.

10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
10/100BaseTX 10/100BaseTX cables are connected to the electrical connector module and then
Cabling at the terminated at an intermediate patch panel.
Electrical
Connector
Module
Important: The patch panel must be properly grounded in a equipment

rack.
Follow these steps to make cable connections at the 10/100BaseT electrical connector
module.
Table 3-14 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module
Step Procedure
1 Connect the 10/100BaseTX cables with male Telco 50 connectors into the
ECM.
Ports 1–12 Ports 13–24

(24-port 10/100BaseTX module) (24-port 10/100BaseTX module)

(16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo
module) module)
(Slot n+1) (Slot n+1)
Drain Wire Stud

(24-port 10/100BaseTX module) (24-port 10/100BaseTX module)

(16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo (16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo
module) module)
(Slot n) (Slot n)
Figure 3-25 10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM
2 Tighten screws on Telco 50 connectors to secure cables to the ECM.

3 Important: The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly has a drain wire. Connect
the drain wire to the 10/100BaseT ECM drain wire stud. See Figure 3-25
10/100BaseTX Cabling using the ECM in Step 1 for drain wire stud
location.

Table 3-14 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Attach one clamp-on ferrite on each cable 6-inches from the 50-pin
connector.
Note: The ferrites may have already been pre-secured to the cables.
5 Label 10/100BaseTX cables with slot number and port numbers based on
the type of 10/100BaseTX module, following local procedures:
■ Ports 1–12 and ports 13–24 (24-port 10/100BaseTX).
■ Ports 3–6 and ports 7–18 (2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo or 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo).
shelf.
7 Repeat Steps 1–5 for cabling at each 10/100BaseT electrical connector
module.
Cable
Management
Bar
10/100BaseTX
Cables to the
Right Side
9 Route the 10/100BaseTX cables to the intermediate patch panel located in

the same or adjacent rack per local procedures.
10 Cut 10/100BaseTX cables to the correct length using cable cutters.
11 Important: The Turin Telco 50 cable assembly is shielded. Connect a
ground wire to the shielding. Connect the ground wire to the equipment
rack following local procedures.

Table 3-14 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module (continued)
Step Procedure
12 Use a punchdown tool to terminate 10/100BaseTX cables at the patch

panel; or terminate cable/pairs onto RJ-45 connectors for termination at
the patch panel1.
Please refer to the following tables for detailed connector pinouts and
color code information:
■ Table 3-15 24-port 10/100BaseTX and 10/100BaseT ECM Telco 50
Connector Pinouts/ Color Code on page 3-45.
■ Table 3-16 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One) on page 3-47.
■ Table 3-17 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 10/100BaseT ECM
Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) on page 3-48.
13 Use category 5 twisted-pair patch cable between the patch panel and
10/100BaseT network equipment.
14 The 10/100BaseTX Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module procedure
is complete.
1
Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for termination of fiber optic cables (SC duplex
module) and Category 5 cables (RJ-45). This patch panel is used for the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and 2-port GbE SX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo module. It
provides flexibility and better identification of pairs terminated at the intermediate patch panel. Turin
part number 950-0070-00 (2-port SC Duplex Adapter, 16-port 10/100 Ethernet Category 5 Module).

24-port 10/100BaseTX Pinouts and Cable Color Code
24-port The following table provides 10/100BaseT electrical connector module Telco 50
10/100BaseTX connector pinouts for cable one and two (required for each 24-port 10/100BaseTX
Pinouts and module). The table also includes information regarding Telco 50 pin #s, 10/100BaseTX
Cable Color cable color code, RJ-45 pin #s and signal.
Code
There are four Telco 50 connectors on an ECM. Refer to Figure 3-23 10/100BaseT
ECM with 24-port 10/100BaseTX Ports, page 3-38 for ECM layout.

Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/ Color Code
Cable One Cable Two
10/100 Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 10/100 Telco 50 Cable RJ-45

BaseTX Signal BaseTX Signal
Module Pin # Color Code Pin # Module Pins # Color Code Pin #
26 White/Blue 1 P1_TX_P 26 White/Blue 1 P13_TX_P

1 Blue/White 2 P1_TX_N 1 Blue/White 2 P13_TX_N
Port 1 Port 13
27 White/Orange 3 P1_RX_P 27 White/Orange 3 P13_RX_P
2 Orange/White 6 P1_RX_N 2 Orange/White 6 P13_RX_N
28 White/Green 1 P2_TX_P 28 White/Green 1 P14_TX_P
3 Green/White 2 P2_TX_N 3 Green/White 2 P14_TX_N
Port 2 Port 14
29 White/Brown 3 P2_RX_P 29 White/Brown 3 P14_RX_P
4 Brown/White 6 P2_RX_N 4 Brown/White 6 P14_RX_N
30 White/Slate 1 P3_TX_P 30 White/Slate 1 P15_TX_P
5 Slate/White 2 P3_TX_N 5 Slate/White 2 P15_TX_N
Port 3 Port 15
31 Red/Blue 3 P3_RX_P 31 Red/Blue 3 P15_RX_P
6 Blue/Red 6 P3_RX_N 6 Blue/Red 6 P15_RX_N
32 Red/Orange 1 P4_TX_P 32 Red/Orange 1 P16_TX_P
7 Orange/Red 2 P4_TX_N 7 Orange/Red 2 P16_TX_N
Port 4 Port 16
33 Red/Green 3 P4_RX_P 33 Red/Green 3 P16_RX_P
8 Green/Red 6 P4_RX_N 8 Green/Red 6 P16_RX_N
34 Red/Brown 1 P5_TX_P 34 Red/Brown 1 P17_TX_P
9 Brown/Red 2 P5_TX_N 9 Brown/Red 2 P17_TX_N
Port 5 Port 17
35 Red/Slate 3 P5_RX_P 35 Red/Slate 3 P17_RX_P
10 Slate/Red 6 P5_RX_N 10 Slate/Red 6 P17_RX_N
36 Black/Blue 1 P6_TX_P 36 Black/Blue 1 P18_TX_P
11 Blue/Black 2 P6_TX_N 11 Blue/Black 2 P18_TX_N
Port 6 Port 18
37 Black/Orange 3 P6_RX_P 37 Black/Orange 3 P18_RX_P
12 Orange/Black 6 P6_RX_N 12 Orange/Black 6 P18_RX_N
38 Black/Green 1 P7_TX_P 38 Black/Green 1 P19_TX_P
13 Green/Black 2 P7_TX_N 13 Green/Black 2 P19_TX_N
Port 7 Port 19
39 Black/Brown 3 P7_RX_P 39 Black/Brown 3 P19_RX_P
14 Brown/Black 6 P7_RX_N 14 Brown/Black 6 P19_RX_N

24-port 10/100BaseTX Pinouts and Cable Color Code

Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/ Color Code (continued)
Cable One Cable Two
10/100 10/100
Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 Telco 50 Cable RJ-45
BaseTX Pin # Color Code Pin # Signal BaseTX Pins # Color Code Pin # Signal
Module Module
40 Black/Slate 1 P8_TX_P 40 Black/Slate 1 P20_TX_P

15 Slate/Black 2 P8_TX_N 15 Slate/Black 2 P20_TX_N
Port 8 Port 20
41 Yellow/Blue 3 P8_RX_P 41 Yellow/Blue 3 P20_RX_P
16 Blue/Yellow 6 P8_RX_N 16 Blue/Yellow 6 P20_RX_N
42 Yellow/Orange 1 P9_TX_P 42 Yellow/Orange 1 P21_TX_P
17 Orange/Yellow 2 P9_TX_N 17 Orange/Yellow 2 P21_TX_N
Port 9 Port 21
43 Yellow/Green 3 P9_RX_P 43 Yellow/Green 3 P21_RX_P
18 Green/Yellow 6 P9_RX_N 18 Green/Yellow 6 P21_RX_N
44 Yellow/Brown 1 P10_TX_P 44 Yellow/Brown 1 P22_TX_P
19 Brown/Yellow 2 P10_TX_N 19 Brown/Yellow 2 P22_TX_N
Port 10 Port 22
45 Yellow/Slate 3 P10_RX_P 45 Yellow/Slate 3 P22_RX_P
20 Slate/Yellow 6 P10_RX_N 20 Slate/Yellow 6 P22_RX_N
46 Violet/Blue 1 P11_TX_P 46 Violet/Blue 1 P23_TX_P
21 Blue/Violet 2 P11_TX_N 21 Blue/Violet 2 P23_TX_N
Port 11 Port 23
47 Violet/Orange 3 P11_RX_P 47 Violet/Orange 3 P23_RX_P
22 Orange/Violet 6 P11_RX_N 22 Orange/Violet 6 P23_RX_N
48 Violet/Green 1 P12_TX_P 48 Violet/Green 1 P24_TX_P
23 Green/Violet 2 P12_TX_N 23 Green/Violet 2 P24_TX_N
Port 12 Port 24
49 Violet/Brown 3 P12_RX_P 49 Violet/Brown 3 P24_RX_P
24 Brown/Violet 6 P12_RX_N 24 Brown/Violet 6 P24_RX_N

2-port GbE plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo Pinouts and Cable Color Code
2-port GbE The following tables provide 10/100BaseT electrical connector module Telco 50
plus 16-port connector pinouts for cable one and two (required for each 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX 10/100BaseTX Combo or 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo module).
Combo There are four Telco 50 connectors on an ECM. Refer to Figure 3-24 10/100BaseT
Pinouts and ECM with 16-port 10/100BaseTX Ports, page 3-39 for ECM layout.
Cable Color
Code Important: Ports 1 and 2 on the 2-port GbE LX plus 10/100BaseTX
Combo and 2-port GbE SX plus 10/100BaseTX Combo modules are
optical ports, ports 3–18 are electrical interface ports. Therefore, module
port #s and patch panel port #s are not straight across. These tables
provide mapping information, 10/100BaseTX port #s, ECM and Patch
Panel port #s, Telco 50 pin #s, 10/100BaseTX cable color code, RJ-45 pin
#s and signal information.

Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable One)
Cable One
10/100 ECM Telco 50
Telco 50 Cable RJ-45
BaseTX Connector and Pin # Color Code Pin # Signal
Module Patch Panel Port
42 Yellow/Orange 1 P3_TX_P
17 Orange/Yellow 2 P3_TX_N
Port 3 Port 9
43 Yellow/Green 3 P3_RX_P
18 Green/Yellow 6 P3_RX_N
44 Yellow/Brown 1 P4_TX_P
19 Brown/Yellow 2 P4_TX_N
Port 4 Port 10
45 Yellow/Slate 3 P4_RX_P
20 Slate/Yellow 6 P4_RX_N
46 Violet/Blue 1 P5_TX_P
21 Blue/Violet 2 P5_TX_N
Port 5 Port 11
47 Violet/Orange 3 P5_RX_P
22 Orange/Violet 6 P5_RX_N
48 Violet/Green 1 P6_TX_P
23 Green/Violet 2 P6_TX_N
Port 6 Port 12
49 Violet/Brown 3 P6_RX_P
24 Brown/Violet 6 P6_RX_N


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two)
Cable Two
10/100 ECM Telco 50
BaseTX Connector and Telco 50 Cable RJ-45 Signal
Pin # Color Code Pin #
Module Patch Panel Port
26 White/Blue 1 P7_TX_P
1 Blue/White 2 P7_TX_N
Port 7 Port 13
27 White/Orange 3 P7_RX_P
2 Orange/White 6 P7_RX_N
28 White/Green 1 P8_TX_P
3 Green/White 2 P8_TX_N
Port 8 Port 14
29 White/Brown 3 P8_RX_P
4 Brown/White 6 P8_RX_N
30 White/Slate 1 P9_TX_P
5 Slate/White 2 P9_TX_N
Port 9 Port 15
31 Red/Blue 3 P9_RX_P
6 Blue/Red 6 P9_RX_N
32 Red/Orange 1 P10_TX_P
7 Orange/Red 2 P10_TX_N
Port 10 Port 16
33 Red/Green 3 P10_RX_P
8 Green/Red 6 P10_RX_N
34 Red/Brown 1 P11_TX_P
9 Brown/Red 2 P11_TX_N
Port 11 Port 17
35 Red/Slate 3 P11_RX_P
10 Slate/Red 6 P11_RX_N
36 Black/Blue 1 P12_TX_P
11 Blue/Black 2 P12_TX_N
Port 12 Port 18
37 Black/Orange 3 P12_RX_P
12 Orange/Black 6 P12_RX_N
38 Black/Green 1 P13_TX_P
13 Green/Black 2 P13_TX_N
Port 13 Port 19
39 Black/Brown 3 P13_RX_P
14 Brown/Black 6 P13_RX_N
40 Black/Slate 1 P14_TX_P
15 Slate/Black 2 P14_TX_N
Port 14 Port 20
41 Yellow/Blue 3 P14_RX_P
16 Blue/Yellow 6 P14_RX_N


Telco 50 Connector Pinouts/Color Code (Cable Two) (continued)
Cable Two
10/100 ECM Telco 50 Telco 50 Cable RJ-45
BaseTX Connector and Signal
Module Patch Panel Port Pin # Color Code Pin #
42 Yellow/Orange 1 P15_TX_P
17 Orange/Yellow 2 P15_TX_N
Port 15 Port 21
43 Yellow/Green 3 P15_RX_P
18 Green/Yellow 6 P15_RX_N
44 Yellow/Brown 1 P16_TX_P
19 Brown/Yellow 2 P16_TX_N
Port 16 Port 22
45 Yellow/Slate 3 P16_RX_P
20 Slate/Yellow 6 P16_RX_N
46 Violet/Blue 1 P17_TX_P
21 Blue/Violet 2 P17_TX_N
Port 17 Port 23
47 Violet/Orange 3 P17_RX_P
22 Orange/Violet 6 P17_RX_N
48 Violet/Green 1 P18_TX_P
23 Green/Violet 2 P18_TX_N
Port 18 Port 24
49 Violet/Brown 3 P18_RX_P
24 Brown/Violet 6 P18_RX_N


Chapter 5
Fiber Optic Cabling
Introduction The Traverse fiber optic backplanes are designed for each optical module to terminate
up to 48 fibers, to support up to 24 optical interfaces. The Traverse 1600 has 16 female
duplex backplane housings and the Traverse 2000 has 20 female duplex backplane
housings to accept the MPX connectors located on the optical modules. The optical
backplane supports singlemode and multimode fiber optic cable.
MPX The following modules have two male MPX connectors (connectors A and B) on the
Connectors top back edge of the module:
and Fiber ■ 8-port OC-3/STM-1.
Position ■ 8-port GbE LX-VC.
■ 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 8-port 100BaseFX-VC Combo.
The following 1-, 2-, and 4-port modules have one male MPX connector (connector A):
■ 1-port GCM OC-12/STM-4.
■ 1-port GCM OC-48/STM-16.
■ 1-port OC-48/STM-16.
■ 1-port OC-192/STM-64.
■ 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo.
■ 2-port GbE SX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo.
■ 4-port OC-12/STM-4.
The single row 12-position connectors on the modules support 1 to 12 fibers for a
maximum fiber count of 24 fibers per slot and will support up to 12-port fiber optic
modules. There is a white stripe reference mark along one edge of the connector. The
white stripe orients the number one fiber position.

MPX Connector Mapping
The following graphic shows the fiber positions for 12-position MPX connectors in
relation to the white stripe reference marker.
B
A
Connector B 12
1
White
Stripe
MPX Connector with

White Stripe Reference
Connector A 12
Mark for Fiber Position 1
1
White
Stripe
Figure 3-27 Fiber Optic Module (viewed from the right side)
MPX 1- and 4-port fiber optic modules and the 2-port GbE plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Connector Combo modules use connector A only. Transmit and receive are mapped as shown in
Mapping the following graphic.
12
"T r
an
s mi
t"
76
"R
ec
eiv
e "
1 White MPX Connector with White Stripe
Connector A Reference Mark for Fiber Position 1
Stripe
Figure 3-28 MPX Connector Mapping for the 1- and 4- Port Modules, and
the GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Modules

Chapter 5 Fiber Optic Cabling
MPX Connector Mapping
The 8-port OC-3/STM-1 and GbE LX-VC fiber optic modules are connected using
connector A and B. Transmit and receive are mapped as shown in the following
graphic.
Connector B
"Receive" 12
1
White
Stripe
Connector A
"Transmit" 12
MPX Connector with White Stripe
Reference Mark for Fiber Position 1
1
White
Stripe
Figure 3-29 MPX Connector Mapping for 8-port Modules
The 2-port GbE plus 8-port 100BaseFX module is connected using connector A and B.
Transmit and receive are mapped to connector A for the 2-port GbE side, and transmit
and receive are mapped to connector B for the 8-port 100BaseFX side as shown in the
following graphic.
Connector B
(8-port 100BaseFX) 12
"Transmit and
Receive"
24
"T r
an
sm
it"
"R 1
ec White
e ive 13
Connector A " Stripe
(2-port GbE)
"Transmit and
Receive"
12
"Tr
an
sm
it"
76
"R
ec
eiv 1
e " White
Stripe
Figure 3-30 MPX Connector Mapping for the GbE plus 100BaseFX Module

Fiber Optic Color Code and Fiber Assignment
Fiber Optic One single-row MPX connector is located on 1-and 4-port modules, and the 2-port GbE
Color Code plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo modules. The fibers are positioned symmetrically
and Fiber from the center when there are fewer than 12 fiber counts.
Assignment Two single-row MPX connectors are located on 8-port modules. A single-row MPX
connector and double-row MPX connector are located on the 2-port GbE plus 8-port
100BaseFX Combo module.
Note: TIA/EIA-598-1 ribbon optical color code is used with exception that the fibers
are positioned symmetrically from the center and the first populated position receives
the blue fiber, regardless of the number of fibers. The following information on fiber
color coding is informational only because the color of the a fiber in a ribbon fiber is
not associated with its position in an MPX connector. That is, the blue fiber could
appear in MPX connector positions 1, 3, 5, or 6 for 6, 4, 2, or 1 port optical modules fed
by matching cable configurations.
Fiber Optic The following ribbon fiber optical color code is used for the following 1-port modules:
Color Code ■ GCM OC-12/STM-4.
1-port Modules ■ GCM OC-48/STM-16.
■ OC-48/STM-16.
■ OC-192/STM-64.
The fibers of connector A are labeled A01 through A12.
Table 3-18 Color Code for 1-Port Fiber Optic Modules
Receive Transmit
Port #
Fiber Color Fiber Color
Position Code Position Code
White Stripe
1 A06 Blue A07 Orange

Fiber Optic Color Code 4-port Modules
Fiber Optical The following ribbon fiber optical color code is used for the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus
Color Code 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and 2-port GbE SX-VC plus 16-port
GbE plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo modules1. The fibers of connector A are labeled A01
10/100BaseTX through A12.
Combo
Modules Table 3-19 Color Code 2-Port GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Module
Receive Transmit
Port#
White Stripe
1 A06 Orange A07 Green

2 A05 Blue A08 Brown
Fiber Optic The following ribbon fiber optical color code is used for the 4-port OC-12/STM-4
Color Code module. The fibers of connector A are labeled A01 through A12.
4-port Modules
Receive Transmit
Port #
White Stripe
1 A06 Brown A07 Slate

2 A05 Green A08 White
3 A04 Orange A09 Red
4 A03 Blue A10 Black
1
The 2-port GbE LX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX Combo and 2-port GbE SX plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX
Combo module requires category 5 twisted-pair and fiber optic cabling. Please refer to
Section 3—Network Interface Cabling, Chapter 4—“10/100BaseTX Cabling,” page 3-35 for category 5
twisted-pair cabling information.

Fiber Optical Color Code 8-port Modules
Fiber Optical The following ribbon fiber optical color code is used for the following 8-port modules:
Color Code ■ OC-3/STM-1.
8-port Modules ■ GbE LX-VC.
The fibers of connector A are labeled A01 through A12 and the fibers of connector B
are labeled B01 through B12.
Receive "B" Transmit "A"

Port #
White Stripe
n/a B01 n/a A01 n/a

n/a B02 n/a A02 n/a
1 B03 Blue A03 Blue
2 B04 Orange A04 Orange
3 B05 Green A05 Green
4 B06 Brown A06 Brown
5 B07 Slate A07 Slate
6 B08 White A08 White
7 B09 Red A09 Red
8 B10 Black A10 Black
n/a B11 n/a A11 n/a
n/a B12 n/a A12 n/a

Fiber Optical Color Code GbE plus 100BaseFX Combo Module
Fiber Optical The following ribbon fiber optical color code is used for the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus
Color Code 8-port 100BaseFX-VC Combo module. The fibers of connector A are labeled A01
GbE plus through A12 and the fibers of connector B are labeled B01 through B24. Please refer to
100BaseFX
Combo Module Table 3-22 Color Code for 2-Port GbE (Connector A)
Receive Transmit
Port#
White Stripe
1 A06 Orange A07 Green

2 A05 Blue A08 Brown
Table 3-23 Color Code for 8-port 100BaseFX (Connector B)
Transmit Receive
Port #
White Stripe
n/a B01 n/a B13 n/a

n/a B02 n/a B14 n/a
1 B03 Blue B15 Blue
2 B04 Orange B16 Orange
3 B05 Green B17 Green
4 B06 Brown B18 Brown
5 B07 Slate B19 Slate
6 B08 White B20 White
7 B09 Red B21 Red
8 B10 Black B22 Black
n/a B11 n/a B23 n/a
n/a B12 n/a B24 n/a

Traverse 1600 Fiber Optic Backplane
Traverse 1600 The Traverse 1600 fiber optic backplane contains 16 duplex backplane housings for the
Fiber Optic module MPX connectors. The fiber optic backplane housings are also marked with a
Backplane white stripe reference marker to properly orient the MPX connectors.
Note: The duplex backplane housings for slot numbers 15 and 16 are used for the
GCM OC-12/STM-4 and GCM OC-48/STM-16 modules.
Module Slot Numbers White Stripe Reference Markers on
Left Side of Backplane Housings
Fiber Optic
Backplane
Figure 3-31 Traverse 1600 Fiber Optic Backplane

Fiber Optic Patch Panel
Traverse 2000 The Traverse 2000 fiber optic backplane contains 20 duplex backplane housings for the
Fiber Optic module MPX connectors. The fiber optic backplane housings are also marked with a
Backplane white stripe reference marker to properly orient the MPX connectors.
Note: The duplex backplane housings for slot numbers 19 and 20 are used for the
GCM OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16 modules.
White Stripe Reference Markers on
Module Slot Numbers
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Fiber Optic
Backplane
Figure 3-32 Traverse 2000 Fiber Optic Backplane
Fiber Optic A fiber optic patch panel may be used to provide access and standard connectors (SC,
Patch Panel FC or FT) for termination of fiber optic cables from the Optical Distribution Frame
(ODF) and from the Traverse fiber optic backplane. Fiber optic cable with a MPX
female connector on one end must be used to make the connection at the Traverse fiber
optic backplane. An MPX connector on the other end of the fiber optic cable is
optional. Fiber optic cable with fan out for termination to single fiber connectors (SC,
FC or FT) is another option.
Turin provides an optional snap-in faceplate patch panel for termination of fiber optic
cables (SC duplex module) and Category 5 cables (RJ-45). This patch panel is used for
the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and 2-port GbE
SX-VC plus 16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo modules. It provides flexibility and
better identification of pairs terminated at the intermediate patch panel. Turin part
number 950-0070-00 (2-port SC Duplex Adapter, 16-port 10/100 Ethernet Category 5
Module).

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make fiber cable connections to the
Equipment and fiber optic patch panel or ODF and the Traverse 1600 or Traverse 2000 fiber optic
Tools backplane:
■ Fiber optic patch panel (optional).
■ Fiber optic cable:
– 12-fiber (or less) singlemode ribbon cable(s) with 12-position female MPX
connectors at both ends for termination to a fiber optic patch panel (optional).
or
– 12-fiber (or less) singlemode cable(s) with a 12-position female MPX
connector at one end, the other end of the fiber optic cable may have a MPX
connector or fan out to single fiber connectors.
■ Large phillips head screwdriver.
Note: One cable with a female MPX connector at one end is required for 1-port
(GCM OC-12/STM-4, GCM OC-48/STM-16, OC-48/STM-16 and OC-192/STM-64)
modules, 2-port (GbE LX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and GbE SX-VC plus
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo) module, and the 4-port (OC-12/STM-4) module.
Note: Two cables with female MPX connectors at one end are required for the 8-port
(OC-3/STM-1 and GbE LX-VC) modules, and the 2-port GbE LX-VC plus 8-port
100BaseFX-VC Combo module.
Fiber Optic Ribbon fiber cabling from the fiber optic patch panel or Optical Distribution Frame
Cabling (ODF) should match the color code stated for the fiber optic modules for the most
effective fiber management. Please refer to the following color code tables:
■ Table 3-18 Color Code for 1-Port Fiber Optic Modules.
■ Table 3-19 Color Code 2-Port GbE plus 10/100BaseTX Combo Module.
■ Table 3-22 Color Code for 2-Port GbE (Connector A).
■ Table 3-23 Color Code for 8-port 100BaseFX (Connector B).



Fiber Optic Cabling

or connector as it may cause eye damage.
Transmit and receive fiber optic cables are connected to and run from the central office
ODF across the horizontal cable racks to the Traverse shelf or to an intermediate fiber
optic patch panel and then to the Traverse shelf.

(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections to the fiber optic
backplane.
Important: Fiber optic cable is very fragile, be careful when handling

and routing the cable. Do not make any bends or coils in the cable less
than 1½ inches in diameter. Kinks or sharp bends in the cable can cause
signal distortion.
Follow these steps to connect fiber optic cables from the ODF or fiber optic patch panel
to the Traverse fiber optic backplane.
Table 3-24 Fiber Optic Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Connect the fiber optic cables to the ODF or intermediate fiber optic patch
panel.
2 Route the fiber optic cables from the ODF or patch panel across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to Traverse shelf following
local procedures.
3 Route the cables to the right or left side of the fiber cable management tray.
If your local procedures support routing fiber optic cables on either side of
the rack, route cables for:
■ Traverse 1600 slots 1–8/Traverse 2000 slots 1–10, to the right side of
the tray when facing the back of the shelf.
■ Traverse 1600 slots 9 –16/Traverse 2000 slots 11–20, to the left side of
the tray when facing the back of the shelf.

Fiber Optic Cabling
Table 3-24 Fiber Optic Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Remove the cover on the fiber cable management tray. Please refer to
Captive
Fasteners
Cover
Fiber Cable Management

Tray
Figure 3-33 Fiber Cable Management Tray
5 Route the cables along the bottom of the tray and bring the cable(s) up to
the correct Traverse fiber optic backplane slot location.
Note: Optical modules with 8 or more ports require a "transmit" and
"receive" cable.
6 Remove the dust cap from the MPX cable connector.
Note: The MPX cable connector must be visually inspected and/or
cleaned using a MPX cleaning kit just before the module is placed in the
shelf and the Traverse node is powered up. Turin recommends this
inspection and cleaning procedure be done as part of module placement.
Please refer to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
4—“Inserting and Removing Modules,” page 1-16 for detailed
instructions.

Fiber Optic Cabling
Step Procedure
7 Align the "white reference marker" on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the receiving fiber optic backplane housing.
White Stripe Reference
Markers
Housing B
Housing A
Note: 1-port (GCM OC-12/STM-4, GCM OC-48/STM-16,

OC-48/STM-16 and OC-192/STM-64) modules, 2-port (GbE LX-VC plus
16-port 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and GbE SX-VC plus 16-port
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo) module, and the 4-port (OC-12/STM-4)
module require one fiber optic cable placed in housing A.
Note: 8-port (OC-3/STM-1 and GbE LX-VC) modules require two fiber
optic cables placed in housing A (transmit) and B (receive). The 2-port
GbE LX-VC plus 8-port 100BaseFX-VC Combo module requires two
fiber optic cables placed in housing A (GbE ports transmit and receive)
and housing B (100BaseFX ports transmit and receive.)
8 Gently push the MPX connector into the fiber optic backplane housing.
9 Repeat Steps 5 through 8 for each fiber optic cable.

Fiber Optic Transmit and Receive Testing
Step Procedure
10 Replace the cover on the fiber cable management tray to hold the cables in
place. Please refer to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures,
Chapter 2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers,” page 1-9 for
detailed instructions.
Cover
Fiber Cable Management

Tray
Figure 3-35 Replace Covers
11 The Fiber Optic Cabling procedure is complete.
Fiber Optic Please refer to Volume 4, Maintenance and Testing, Section 3—Troubleshooting,
Transmit and Chapter 3—“Transmit and Receive Signal Levels” for acceptable minimum/maximum
Receive output power and receiver levels.
Testing

S ECTION 4 T RAVERSE S YSTEM A LARM , T IMING AND
E THERNET C ABLING
SECTION 4
Contents
Chapter 1
Traverse System Alarm Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Normally-open Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Fail-safe Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) Protocol Interface. . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Environmental Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Traverse System Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Remote Visual and Remote Audible Alarm Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Environmental Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Fail-safe Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Chapter 2
Traverse System Timing Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Primary and Secondary Timing I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
T1 Timing Interface Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
T1 Timing Interface Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Composite Clock Timing Interface Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Verify Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40

Volume 2 Section 4 Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling
Chapter 3
Traverse System DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
DCN Ethernet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
RS-232 Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-2 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Figure 4-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM Connector . . . . 4-5
Figure 4-4 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Figure 4-5 PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-6 PDAP-2S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 4-8
Figure 4-7 PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-8 PDAP-4S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 4-10
Figure 4-9 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Figure 4-10 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Figure 4-11 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Figure 4-12 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Figure 4-13 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Figure 4-14 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Figure 4-15 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Figure 4-16 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Figure 4-17 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
Figure 4-18 Remote Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Figure 4-19 Remote Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
Figure 4-20 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Figure 4-21 Fail-safe Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Figure 4-22 BITS Clock (Input) and Derived DS1 (Output) Timing Signals . . . 4-30
Figure 4-23 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-24 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling . . . . . . . 4-31
Figure 4-25 T1 Timing Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Figure 4-26 T1 Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
Figure 4-27 Composite Clock Input Timing Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Figure 4-28 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Figure 4-29 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interfaces . 4-42
Figure 4-30 RJ-45 Plug and DCN Ethernet Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Figure 4-31 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Figure 4-32 Clamp-on Ferrite with Two Turns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
Figure 4-33 RJ-45 Plug and RS-232 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
Figure 4-34 Traverse Main Backplane RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47

List of Tables
Table 4-1 Visual and Audible System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-2 Fail-safe and Alarm Cut Off Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Table 4-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table 4-4 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-5 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Table 4-6 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Table 4-8 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-9 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Outputs (Optional) and Wire-Wrap Posts 4-11
Table 4-7 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Table 4-10 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Table 4-11 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Table 4-12 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Table 4-13 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Table 4-14 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Table 4-15 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Table 4-16 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Table 4-17 Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Table 4-18 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Table 4-19 T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Table 4-20 Composite Clock Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Table 4-21 T1 Timing Interface Input Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Table 4-22 T1 Timing Interface Output Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Table 4-23 Composite Clock Timing Interface Input Connections . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Table 4-24 DCN Ethernet Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Table 4-25 RS-232 Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Table 4-26 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Table 4-27 RS-232 Interface Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46


SECTION 4 TRAVERSE S YSTEM ALARM, TIMING AND ETHERNET CABLING
Chapter 1
Traverse System Alarm Interface
Introduction The General Control Module (GCM) generates Traverse system alarm signals and
provides the common (COM), normally-open (NO) and normally-closed contacts
through individual relays. The Traverse system supports standard system critical,
major, minor; visual and audible alarms. Access to system alarm contacts is provided
via wire-wrap posts located on the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes1.
Normally-open Contacts. System alarms operate by default using the COM and NO
contacts. When an alarm state occurs the circuit between the COM and NO contacts is
closed, generating a visual or audible alarm. Alarm contacts are bridged between the
active and standby GCMs. A single GCM is capable of generating and maintaining
system alarms if the standby GCM is out of service.
Fail-safe Alarm. All system alarms are masked and a fail-safe alarm is generated if
both GCMs go out-of-service. The fail-safe alarm is the only normally-closed alarm.
The fail-safe alarm is generated when GCMs are installed and operational, and then go
into an out-of-service state. The fail-safe alarm is also generated when both GCMs are
physically removed from the Traverse shelf.
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) Protocol Interface. The Traverse
backplane has a TBOS interface which will support connection to remote telemetry
units in a future release.
Environmental Alarms. The Traverse backplane provides hardware support for
sixteen environmental alarm inputs2 and eight environmental control outputs. The
environmental telemetry inputs and outputs are supported by the optional
Environmental Alarm Module (EAM) located on the main backplane. The EAM
provides additional system-management functions to accommodate customer-defined
alarm input/output requirements. The module is field replaceable and can be replaced
without disconnecting the alarm wiring.
1
Refer to pre-Release 1.3 Traverse system documentation, Traverse 1600 Alarm, Timing and Ethernet
Cabling if your Traverse 1600 main backplane is the original Traverse 1600 main backplane design with
6-position terminal blocks for the alarm and timing interface.
2
Release 1.4 software supports four environmental alarm inputs when the Traverse shelf is equipped with
an Enhanced GCM, GCM OC-12/STM-4, or GCM OC-48/STM-16 module(s), and an optional
Environmental Alarm Module (EAM). Support for additional environmental alarm inputs and outputs is
planned for a future release.

Volume 2, Section 4: Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling
Introduction
This chapter provides alarm information and step-by-step instructions on how to

connect visual, power, and fuse alarm cables to the PDAP-2S and PDAP-4S and alarm
interface cables to Traverse main backplane.
■ Traverse System Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 4-3.
■ Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM, page 4-5.
■ PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts, page 4-8.
■ PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts, page 4-10.
■ PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Connections, page 4-12.
■ PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 4-13.
■ PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections, page 4-14.
■ PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections, page 4-15.
■ PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 4-16.
■ Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf, page 4-17.
■ Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf, page 4-19.
■ Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf, page 4-21.
■ Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf, page 4-23.
■ Remote Visual and Remote Audible Alarm Output Connections, page 4-25.
■ Environmental Alarm Input Connections, page 4-27.
■ Fail-safe Alarm, page 4-28.
The step-by-step instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in CO
refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Configuration Checklists,” Network Cabling
Checklist, page 7-9.

Chapter 1 Traverse System Alarm Interface
Traverse System Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts
Traverse The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes provide access to system alarm
System Alarm contacts via 0.045-inch square wire-wrap posts on 0.200-inch centers. The following
Output graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts are located on the Traverse main
Wire-Wrap backplane.
Posts 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
System Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Figure 4-1 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplane
system alarm labeling and wire-wrap post numbers. The wire-wrap posts shown in grey
are used for alarm cabling.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 4-2 System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Traverse System Alarm Output Wire-Wrap Posts
The following table provides the visual and audible alarm contacts supported by the
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes and the wire-wrap posts for
normally-open (NO) relays.
Table 4-1 Visual and Audible System Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms Audible Alarms
Critical Normally-Open Critical Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Post 1 Post 2 n/a Post 4 Post 5 n/a
Major Normally-Open Major Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Minor Normally-Open Minor Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
Remote Normally-Open Remote Normally-Open
NO COM NC NO COM NC
The following table provides the fail-safe and alarm cut off contacts supported by the
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes and the wire-wrap posts for
normally-closed (NC) and common (COM) relays.
Table 4-2 Fail-safe and Alarm Cut Off Wire-Wrap Posts
FAIL-SAFE Normally-Closed Alarm Cut Off (ACO) Input
NO COM NC COM ACO
n/a Post 26 Post 27 Post 28 Post 29
Important: Each set of system alarms provides common (COM),

normally-open (NO) and normally-closed (NC) contacts. All alarms,
except the fail-safe alarm, are connected using the NO and COM contacts.
Connect the fail-safe alarm using NC and COM contacts.

Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM
Environmental The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes provide access to
Alarm Input environmental alarm contacts via 0.045-inch square wire-wrap posts on 0.200-inch
Wire-Wrap centers. Reporting of environmental alarm inputs and outputs requires an
Posts and EAM Environmental Alarm Module (EAM) plugged into the EAM connector. The following
graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts and the EAM connector are located on the
Traverse main backplane. If the EAM is not plugged into the main backplane refer to
Volume 4, Maintenance and Testing, Section 1—System Monitoring, Chapter
2—“Routine Maintenance,” Environmental Alarm Module Replacement, page 1-49
for placement instructions.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Environmental
Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Environmental
Alarm Module
(EAM)
Connector
Figure 4-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts and EAM Connector

The following graphic provides Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplane
environmental alarm labeling and wire-wrap post numbers3. The wire-wrap posts
shown in grey are used for environmental alarm input cabling.
ENV IN ENV OUT
RTN NO C
1 9 1
2 10 2
3 11 3
4 12 4
5 13 5
6 14 6
7 15 7
8 16 8
TBOS
+ TX - + RX -
Figure 4-4 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3
The TBOS protocol interface is planned for a future release.

The following table provides the environmental alarm contacts supported by the
Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main backplanes. Posts 1 through 4 are supported for
environmental alarm input cabling.
Table 4-3 Environmental Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Environmental Environmental
Input Alarms Output Alarms
# RTN # NO C
Post 1 Post 9 Post 1
TBOS
TX RX
+ - + -
Post 1 Post 2 Post 3 Post 4

PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
PDAP-2S Fuse Fuse alarm cabling is connected from the PDAP-2S to a CO alarm panel for visual or
and Visual audible reporting of fuse A or B failure, or to the Traverse main backplane as an
Alarm environmental alarm input connection. Visual alarm cabling is connected from the
Wire-Wrap Traverse main backplane to 0.045-inch wire-wrap posts on the back of the PDAP-2S.
Posts The following graphic shows where these wire-wrap posts are located.
Fuse and
Visual Alarm
Wire-Wrap
Posts
Figure 4-5 PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides PDAP-2S fuse and visual alarm labeling and
wire-wrap post numbers.
NC C NO
FA 1 2 3
Fuse Alarm
Wire-Wrap Posts
FB 4 5 6
7 8 9 C
Visual Alarm
Wire-Wrap Posts
10 11 12
CRIT MAJ MIN
Figure 4-6 PDAP-2S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling

PDAP-2S Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Table 4-4 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Fuse Alarms
Fuse A
NC C NO
(Normally-Closed) (Common) (Normally-Open)
Fuse B
Table 4-5 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical Common Major Common Minor Common

(CRIT) (C) (MAJ) (C) (MIN) (C)
Post 10 Post 7 Post 11 Post 8 Post 12 Post 9

PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
PDAP-4S Power and fuse alarm cabling is connected from the PDAP-4S to a CO alarm panel for
Power, Fuse visual reporting of power failure, visual or audible reporting of fuse A or B failure, or
and Visual to the Traverse main backplane as environmental alarm input connections. Visual alarm
Alarm cabling is connected from the Traverse main backplane to 0.045-inch wire-wrap posts
Wire-Wrap on the back of the PDAP-4S. The following graphic shows where these wire-wrap
posts are located.
Posts
Power, Fuse
and Visual
Alarm
Wire-Wrap
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 4-7 PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides PDAP-4S power, fuse, and visual alarm labeling and
PWR FUSE BAY ALARMS

CONTACTS ACTIVATE
VIS AUD NC NO C A R
NC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CRIT
C 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MAJ
NO 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 MIN
Figure 4-8 PDAP-4S Alarm Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling
Table 4-6 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Power Alarm
Visual Power
NC C NO

PDAP-4S Power, Fuse and Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
Table 4-7 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
Fuse Alarms
Visual Fuse
NC C NO
Audible Fuse
Table 4-8 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Inputs and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical Major Minor

(CRIT) Return (MAJ) Return (MIN) Return
Activate (R) Activate (R) Activate (R)
(A) (A) (A)
Post 7 Post 8 Post 15 Post 16 Post 23 Post 24
Table 4-9 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Outputs (Optional) and Wire-Wrap Posts
Visual Alarms
Critical
NC NO C
(Normally-Closed) (Normally-Open) (Common)
Major
Minor

Required The following equipment and tools are required to complete system alarm cabling for
Equipment and each Traverse shelf:
Tools ■ 22 or 24 AWG wire.
■ Flats or wire cutters.
■ Wire-wrap tool for .045-inch x .045-inch posts.
PDAP-2S Fuse Follow these steps to complete fuse alarm connections at PDAP-2S.
Alarm
Important: Always wear a properly Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist
Connections strap when making alarm wire connections to the PDAP-2S.
Table 4-10 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for Fuse A and Fuse B alarms,
normally-open (NO) and common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and
common (C). Strip back the insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch.
2 Fuse alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-2S. Terminate the Fuse A alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
NC C NO
FA 1 2 3
FB 4 5 6
7 8 9 C
10 11 12
CRIT MAJ MIN
Figure 4-9 PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for Fuse B alarm wires.

4 Route fuse alarm wires to the CO alarm panel following local procedures.
5 Connect Fuse A and Fuse B alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel
following local procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for each fuse alarm (normally-open and
common or normally-closed and common).
6 The PDAP-2S Fuse Alarm Connections procedure is complete.

PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections
PDAP-2S Follow these steps to complete visual alarm input connections at the back of the
Visual Alarm PDAP-2S.
Input
Connections
strap when making alarm wire connections to the PDAP-2S.
Table 4-11 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Will visual alarm input connections be made at the PDAP-2S?

■ If yes, go to Step 2 to complete PDAP-2S visual alarm input
connections.
■ If no, and visual alarm input connections are made at a central office
visual alarm panel, go to the CO Visual Alarm Relay Output
Connections at the Main Backplane procedure on page 4-17.
2 Two alarm wires are required for each type of visual alarm. Strip back the
insulation on the visual critical and common wires by ¼ inch.
3 Visual alarm input wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of
the PDAP-2S. Terminate the two alarm wires for critical (CRIT) and
common (C) using a wire-wrap tool.
NC C NO
FA 1 2 3
FB 4 5 6
7 8 9 C
10 11 12
CRIT MAJ MIN
Figure 4-10 PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for major (MAJ)/common (C) and minor

(MIN)/common (C) wires.
5 Route visual alarm cables to the left side of the PDAP-2S and down the
rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.
6 The PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input Connections procedure is complete.

PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections
PDAP-4S Follow these steps to complete power alarm connections at PDAP-4S.

Power Alarm
Connections
Table 4-12 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for Power alarms, normally-open (NO) and
common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and common (C). Strip back the
insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch.
2 Power alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-4S. Terminate the power alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
PWR
NC 1
C 9
NO 17
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 4-11 PDAP-4S Power Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Route power alarm wires to the CO power alarm panel following local
procedures.
4 Connect power alarm wires to the CO power alarm panel following local
procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for the power alarm (normally-open and
5 The PDAP-4S Power Alarm Connections procedure is complete.

PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections
PDAP-4S Fuse Follow these steps to complete fuse alarm connections at PDAP-4S.
Alarm
Connections
Table 4-13 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections
Step Procedure
1 Two alarm wires are required for visual and audible fuse alarms,
normally-open (NO) and common (C) or normally-closed (NC) and
common (C). Strip back the insulation on the fuse wires by ¼ inch.
2 Fuse alarm wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of the
PDAP-4S. Terminate the visual fuse alarm wires using a wire-wrap tool.
FUSE
VIS AUD
NC 2 3
C 10 11
NO 18 19
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 4-12 PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
3 Repeat Step 1 for the audible fuse alarm wires.

4 Route fuse alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel following local
procedures.
5 Connect visual and audible fuse alarm wires to the CO fuse alarm panel
Note: Two wires are required for each fuse alarm (normally-open and
6 The PDAP-4S Fuse Alarm Connections procedure is complete.

PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections
PDAP-4S Follow these steps to complete visual alarm input connections at the back of the
Visual Alarm PDAP-4S.
Input
Connections
Table 4-14 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Will visual alarm input connections be made at the PDAP-4S?

■ If yes, go to Step 2 to complete PDAP-4S visual alarm input
connections.
■ If no, and visual alarm input connections are made at a central office
visual alarm panel, go to the Visual Alarm Output Connections at
the First Shelf procedure on page 4-17.
2 Two alarm wires are required for each type of visual alarm. Strip back the
insulation on the visual critical and common wires by ¼ inch.
3 Visual alarm input wires are connected to wire-wrap posts on the back of
the PDAP-4S. Terminate the two alarm wires for critical (CRIT) activate
(A) and Return (R) using a wire-wrap tool.
BAY ALARMS
A R
7 8 CRIT
15 16 MAJ
23 24 MIN
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 4-13 PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for major (MAJ)/common (C) and minor

(MIN)/common (C) wires.
5 Route visual alarm cables to the left side of the PDAP-4S and down the
rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.
6 The PDAP-4S Visual Alarm Input Connections procedure is complete.

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Visual Alarm Follow these steps to complete visual alarm output connections at the first Traverse
Output main backplane.
Connections at
the First Shelf
strap when making alarm wire connections to the Traverse main
backplane.
Table 4-15 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Are visual alarm input connections complete at the PDAP (PDAP-2S or

PDAP-4S)?
■ If yes, continue to Step 4 of this procedure.
■ If no, complete either the PDAP-2S Visual Alarm Input
Connections procedure on page 4-13 or the PDAP-4S Visual Alarm
Input Connections on page 4-16 first and then go to Step 4 of this
procedure.
or
■ If no, and visual alarm input connections are made at some other
central office visual alarm panel, go to Step 2.
2 Connect CO visual (critical, major and minor) alarm wires to the CO
visual alarm panel following local procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for each visual alarm (critical, major,
minor), a normally-open (NO) and common (C) wire.
3 Route the visual alarm wires from the CO visual alarm panel across the
horizontal cable rack following local procedures.
4 Route the visual alarm wires down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf
in the rack following local procedures.
5 Remove the back cover from the main backplane. Please refer to
6 Bring the visual alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the first Traverse shelf.

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Table 4-15 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Bring the visual alarm wires over to the visual alarm wire-wrap posts on
the Traverse main backplane.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 13 1412 15
11
16
10 9
17 8 187 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Top Cable
Port
Figure 4-14 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
8 Cut the visual critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
insulation by ¼ inch.
9 Terminate the wire on the critical alarm normally-open (NO) and the
common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
10 Repeat Steps 8 and 9 for major and minor visual alarm connections.
11 Is there another Traverse shelf in the rack?
■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, Visual Alarm Output
Connections at the Next Shelf.
■ If no, the Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Visual Alarm Follow these steps to complete visual alarm output connections at the next Traverse
Connections at
the Next Shelf
backplane.
Table 4-16 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Strip back the insulation on the visual alarm and common wires by ¼ inch.
Note: Two wires are required for each visual alarm (critical, major,
2 Terminate visual critical, major, minor and common alarm wires to the
first Traverse main backplane.
Note: Alarm wire-wrap posts are sized to accept two sets of wires.
3 Route the visual alarm wires out through the top cable port on the left side
of the Traverse shelf and down the rack rails to the next Traverse shelf in
the rack following local procedures.
4 Remove the back cover from the Traverse main backplane.
5 Bring the visual alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the Traverse shelf.

Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Table 4-16 Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Bring the visual alarm wires over to the visual alarm wire-wrap posts on
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 13 1412 15
11
16
10 9
17 8 187 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 4-15 Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
7 Cut the visual critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
8 Terminate the wire on the critical visual alarm normally-open (NO) and
the common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for major and minor visual alarm connections.
■ If yes, repeat Steps 1–9 to make visual alarm connections for the next
shelf in the rack making alarm connections at the second and third
shelf.
■ If no, the Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Audible Alarm Follow these steps to complete audible alarm connections at the Traverse main
Output backplane.
Connections at
the First Shelf
backplane.
Table 4-17 Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections
Step Procedure
1 Connect CO audible (critical, major and minor) alarm wires to the CO

alarm panel following local procedures.
Note: Two wires are required for each audible alarm (critical, major,
2 Route the audible alarm wires from the CO alarm panel across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the first Traverse main
backplane following local procedures.
3 Remove the back cover from the main backplane. Please refer to
4 Bring the audible alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf
Table 4-17 Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the audible alarm wires over to the audible alarm wire-wrap posts on
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Top Cable
Port
Figure 4-16 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
6 Cut the audible critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
7 Terminate the wire on the critical alarm normally-open (NO) and common
(C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
8 Repeat Steps 6 and 7 for major and minor audible alarm connections.
■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, Audible Alarm Output
Connections at the Next Shelf.
■ If no, the Audible Alarm Relay Output Connections procedure is
complete.

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Audible Alarm Follow these steps to complete audible alarm output connections at the next Traverse
Connections at
the Next Shelf
backplane.
Table 4-18 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Step Procedure
1 Strip back the insulation on the audible alarm and common wires by ¼
inch.
Note: Two wires are required for each audible alarm (critical, major,
2 Terminate audible critical, major, minor and common alarm wires to the
first Traverse main backplane.
Note: Alarm wire-wrap posts are sized to accept two sets of wires.
3 Route the audible alarm wires out through the top cable port on the left
side of the Traverse shelf and down the rack rails to the next Traverse shelf
in the rack following local procedures.
4 Remove the back cover from the Traverse main backplane.
5 Bring the audible alarm wires through the top cable port on the left side of
the Traverse shelf.

Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf
Table 4-18 Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Bring the audible alarm wires over to the audible alarm wire-wrap posts on
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Top Cable
Port
Figure 4-17 Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts
7 Cut the audible critical alarm wires to the correct length and strip back the
8 Terminate the wire on the critical audible alarm normally-open (NO) and
the common (C) posts using a wire-wrap tool.
9 Repeat Steps 7 and 8 for major and minor audible alarm connections.
■ If yes, repeat Steps 1–9 to make audible alarm connections for the
next shelf in the rack making alarm connections at the second and
third shelf.
■ If no, the Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf

Remote Visual and Remote Audible Alarm Output Connections
Remote Visual The Traverse main backplane provides optional remote visual and remote audible
and Remote alarm output connections. The steps to make these connections are similar to the
Audible Alarm procedures provided for central office visual and audible alarm output connections; the
Output only difference is the location of the wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the
Connections connection at the remote alarm cross-connect panel in the central office.
The following graphic provides the location of the remote visual alarm wire-wrap posts
on the Traverse main backplane, labeling and wire-wrap post numbers.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
13 13 1412 15
11
16
10 9
17 8 187 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 4-18 Remote Visual Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Remote Visual and Remote Audible Alarm Output Connections
The following graphic provides the location of the remote audible alarm wire-wrap
posts on the Traverse main backplane, labeling and wire-wrap post numbers.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 4-19 Remote Audible Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

Environmental Alarm Input Connections
Environmental The Traverse main backplane provides optional environmental alarm connections.
Alarm Input Reporting of environmental alarm inputs and outputs requires an Environmental Alarm
Connections Module (EAM) plugged into the EAM connector. The following graphic shows where
these wire-wrap posts and the EAM connector are located on the Traverse main
backplane. If the EAM is not plugged into the main backplane refer to Volume 4,
Maintenance and Testing, Section 1—System Monitoring, Chapter 2—“Routine
Maintenance,” Environmental Alarm Module Replacement, page 1-49 for
placement instructions.
Two wires are required for each environmental input alarm, an environmental input and
a return (RTN) wire. The steps to make these connections are similar to the procedures
provided for central office audible alarm output connections; the only difference is the
location of the wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the connection at the
equipment being monitored.
The following graphic provides the location of the first four environmental alarm input
and return (RTN) wire-wrap posts on the Traverse main backplane, labeling and
ENV IN ENV OUT

RTN NO C
1 9 1
2 10 2
3 11 3
4 12 4
5 13 5
6 14 6
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
7 15 7
8 16 8
TBOS
+ TX - + RX -
Environmental
Alarm Module
(EAM)
Connector
Figure 4-20 Environmental Alarm Input Wire-Wrap Posts

Fail-safe Alarm
Fail-safe Alarm The Traverse main backplane provides a fail-safe alarm output connection. The
fail-safe alarm is a normally-closed contact and may be connected to either a visual or
audible alarm or to both. The fail-safe alarm is generated when GCMs are installed and
operational, and then go into an out-of-service state. The fail-safe alarm is also
generated when both GCMs are physically removed from the Traverse shelf.
The steps to make the fail-safe alarm connection is similar to the procedures provided
for central office visual and audible alarm output connections; the only difference is the
location of the wire-wrap posts on the main backplane.
The following graphic provides the location of the fail-safe alarm wire-wrap posts on
the Traverse main backplane, labeling and wire-wrap post numbers.
NO C NC NO C NC
CRITVIS CRITAUD
1 2 3 4 5 6
MAJVIS MAJAUD
7 8 9 10 11 12
MINVIS MINAUD
13 14 15 16 17 18
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
REMVIS REMAUD
19 20 21 22 23 24
FAILSAFE ACO RTN
25 26 27 28 29
Figure 4-21 Fail-safe Alarm Wire-Wrap Posts

SECTION 4TRAVERSE S YSTEM ALARM , TIMING AND ETHERNET CABLING
Chapter 2
Traverse System Timing Interface
Introduction The Traverse system supports both DS1 and Composite Clock Building Integrated
Timing Supply (BITS)1 clock references. The General Control Modules (GCMs)
timing subsystem provides system and line timing to all modules. The timing
subsystem can recover line timing from four interfaces, either four ports on one module
or four interfaces across multiple modules.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect timing inputs from
the central office SASE clock timing source and timing outputs from a Traverse shelf
with wire-wrap posts to the SASE clock.
■ Primary and Secondary Timing I/O, page 4-30.
■ Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts, page 4-31.
■ Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts, page 4-32.
■ T1 Timing Interface Input, page 4-33.
■ T1 Timing Interface Output, page 4-35.
■ Composite Clock Timing Interface Input, page 4-37.
■ Verify Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 4-40.
For timing software configuration information, refer to Volume 3, Provisioning.
1
SASE clock is also referred to as a Timing Signal Generator (TSG) in the central office.

Primary and Secondary Timing I/O
Primary and Derived T1 timing signals (derived from an optical signal) are sent (output) from a
Secondary Traverse shelf to the central office SASE clock reference signal monitor and selector
Timing I/O (RSMS). The T1 timing outputs are connected at the main backplane.
Synchronized primary and secondary timing inputs from the central office SASE T1 or
Composite Clock timing source are connected at the Traverse main backplane and
bridged to the GCMs.
The following figure shows the RSMS receiving derived T1 timing signals from three
Traverse shelves2 in a central office. The SASE clock sends the synchronized timing
signal out to all of the Traverse shelves in the central office.
BITS Clock Timing Signal

OC-N
Derived DS1 Signal

Derived DS1 Signal Derived DS1 Signal
OC-N OC-N
Reference Signal
Monitor and Selector
(RSMS)
BITS Clock
(Timing Signal Generator)
(primary) DS1/Composite Clock Intra-Office Timing Signals (primary)

(secondary) (secondary)
BITS Clock Timing Signal BITS Clock Timing Signal
OC-N OC-N
Central Office
Figure 4-22 BITS Clock (Input) and Derived DS1 (Output) Timing Signals
2
Timing signals from three Traverse shelves are output to the SASE for redundancy.

Chapter 2 Traverse System Timing Interface
Timing Interface Input and Output Wire-Wrap Posts
Timing The Traverse main backplane provides access to timing interface contacts via
Interface Input 0.200-inch spaced, 0.045-inch square wire-wrap posts. The following graphic shows
and Output where these wire-wrap posts are located on the Traverse main backplane.
Wire-Wrap
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Posts
Timing Interface
Wire-Wrap Posts
Figure 4-23 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
The following graphic provides Traverse main backplane timing interface labeling and
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
+ 5 6 - 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
OUT OUT
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 4-24 Timing Interface3 Wire-Wrap Post Numbers and Labeling
3
E1 and 2M (2MHz) are SDH timing interfaces.

Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
Timing The following table provides T14 timing interface contacts supported by the Traverse
Interface main backplane.
Wire-Wrap
Posts Table 4-19 T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
T1 Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
Post Post
Description Description
# #
1 T1/E1_INA+ 2 T1/E1_INA-
3 T1/E1_INB+ 4 T1/E1_INB-
5 Shield 6 Shield
7 T1/E1_OUTA+ 8 T1/E1_OUTA-
9 T1/E1_OUTB+ 10 T1/E1_OUTB-
The following table provides Composite Clock (CC) timing interface contacts
supported by the main backplane.
Table 4-20 Composite Clock Timing Interface Wire-Wrap Posts
Composite Clock Timing Wire-Wrap Posts
Post Post
Description Description
# #
1 CC2M_INA+ 2 CC2M_INA-
3 CC2M_INB+ 4 CC2M_INB-
5 Shield 6 Shield
7 CC2M_OUTA+ 8 CC2M_OUTA-
9 CC2M_OUTB+ 10 CC2M_OUTB-
4
DS1 timing inputs are labeled T1 on the Traverse main backplane and are referred to as T1 throughout
the following procedures.

T1 Timing Interface Input
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make timing interface connections
Equipment and to the Traverse main backplane:
Tools ■ 2-pair 22 AWG wire (with drain wire5).
■ Flats or wire cutters.
■ Wire-wrap tool for .045-inch x .045-inch posts
T1 Timing Follow these steps to complete T1 timing interface primary and secondary6 input
Interface Input connections at the main backplane.
Table 4-21 T1 Timing Interface Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Connect 22 AWG timing wires to the central office SASE T1 primary and
secondary (optional) timing source.
Note: Two 2-pair wires are required for primary and secondary
(T1/E1_INA and T1/E1_INB) connections.
2 Route the T1 primary and secondary timing wires across the horizontal
cable rack and down the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse shelf
3 Remove the back cover from the Traverse shelf. Please refer to
5
Drain wire required for shielding.
6
The secondary T1 timing input connection is optional.

T1 Timing Interface Input
Table 4-21 T1 Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Bring the T1 primary and secondary input timing wires through the top
cable port and over to the T1/E1_INA and T1/E1_INB wire-wrap posts on
the main backplane.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 OUT
10 9 8 7 6 OUT
5 4 3 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 4-25 T1 Timing Input Wire-Wrap Posts
5 Cut the T1 primary and secondary input timing wires to the correct length
and strip back the insulation by ¼ inch.
6 Terminate primary and secondary wires on the timing interface posts using
a wire-wrap tool.
7 Terminate drain wire to shield wire-wrap posts using wire-wrap tool.

T1 Timing Interface Output
Table 4-21 T1 Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Verify that the correct pins are jumpered on header J2 (T1/E1_IN), see
Verify Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 4-40.
9 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that require T1 Timing?
■ If yes, repeat Steps 1 through 8 for each shelf.
■ If no, the T1 Timing Interface Input Connections procedure is
complete.
T1 Timing Follow these steps to complete T1 timing interface primary and secondary7 output
Interface connections at the Traverse main backplane.
Output
backplane.
Table 4-22 T1 Timing Interface Output Connections
Step Procedure
2 Strip back the insulation on the primary and secondary (optional) output
timing wires by ¼ inch.
(T1/E1_OUTA and T1/E1_OUTB) connections.
7
The secondary T1 timing output connection is optional.

T1 Timing Interface Output
Table 4-22 T1 Timing Interface Output Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
3 Terminate primary and secondary output timing wires on T1/E1_OUTA

and T1/E1_OUTB wire-wrap posts using a wire-wrap tool.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12OUT
11 10 9 8 7OUT
6 5 4 3 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 4-26 T1 Timing Output Wire-Wrap Posts
4 Route the T1 primary and secondary output timing wires up the rack rails
and across the horizontal cable rack to the central office SASE clock.
5 Terminate T1 output timing wires at the central office SASE clock.
6 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that provide T1 timing
signals to the central office SASE Clock?
■ If no, the T1 Timing Interface Output Connections procedure is
complete.

Composite Clock Timing Interface Input
Composite Follow these steps to complete Composite Clock timing interface primary and
Clock Timing secondary8 input connections at the main backplane.
Interface Input
backplane.
Note: Composite Clock output connectors are not used.
Table 4-23 Composite Clock Timing Interface Input Connections
Step Procedure
1 Connect 22 AWG timing wires to the central office SASE Composite

Clock primary and secondary (optional) timing source.
(CC2M_INA and CC2M_INB) connections.
2 Route the Composite Clock primary and secondary timing wires across the
horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse
shelf following local procedures.
8
The secondary Composite Clock timing input connection is optional.

Table 4-23 Composite Clock Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Bring the Composite Clock primary and secondary input timing wires
through the top cable port and over to the CC2M_IN wire-wrap posts on
the main backplane.
T1/E1 CC2M
+ 1 A 2 -+ 1 A 2 -
IN IN
+ 3 B 4 -+ 3 B 4 -
5 6 5 6
+ 7 A 8 -+ 7 A 8 -
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10OUT OUT
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
+ 9 B 10 - + 9 B 10 -
Figure 4-27 Composite Clock Input Timing Wire-Wrap Posts
5 Cut the primary and secondary input timing wires to the correct length and
strip back the insulation by ¼ inch.
6 Terminate primary and secondary wires on the timing interface posts using
a wire-wrap tool.
7 Terminate drain wire to shield wire-wrap posts using wire-wrap tool.

Table 4-23 Composite Clock Timing Interface Input Connections (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Verify that the correct pins are jumpered on header J3 (CC2M_IN), see
Verify Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3, page 4-40.
9 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack that require Composite
Clock Timing?
■ If no, the Composite Clock Timing Interface Input Connections

Verify Jumpers on Headers J2 and J3
Verify Jumpers For T1 primary and secondary timing input signals verify jumpers are placed between:
on Headers J2 ■ Pins 1 and 2 (T1_INA primary), and pins 7 and 8 (T1_INB secondary) at the J2
and J3 header. These jumpers are required for 100 ohms DS1 timing signal termination.
For Composite Clock primary and secondary timing input signals, verify jumpers are
placed between:
■ Pins 1 and 2 (CC_INA), and pins 7 and 8 (CC_INB) at the J3 header. These
jumpers are required for 133 ohms Composite Clock timing signal termination.
These 12-pin headers are located on the main backplane just below the timing interface
wire-wrap posts.
T1/E1_IN CC2M_IN
T1_INA Pins 1, 2 1 2 1 2 CC_INA Pins 1, 2 (primary)

(primary) 3 4 3 4
5 6 5 6
T1_INB Pins 7, 8 7 8 7 8 CC_INB Pins 7, 8 (secondary)
(secondary) 9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
J2 J3
J2 J3
Figure 4-28 Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3

SECTION 4TRAVERSE S YSTEM ALARM , ETHERNET AND TIMING INTERFACE CABLING
Chapter 3
Traverse System DCN Ethernet and RS-232
Interface
Introduction The Traverse system provides a data communications network (DCN) to connect a
Traverse node to the TransNav Management System and to other remote management
devices. The DCN Ethernet interface is located on the Traverse main backplane and is
bridged to both the working and protect General Control Modules (GCMs) for
communication to Traverse nodes. This enables the TransNav Management System to
always talk to the working GCM, even after a protection switch.
A network of Traverse nodes can be managed over the service provider’s DCN as long
as one Traverse node is directly connected to that network through the DCN Ethernet
interface. This node is referred to as the Traverse Management Gateway Node (MGN).
Traverse nodes that have no direct connection to an DCN can communicate with the
TransNav system indirectly, through the Traverse Management Gateway node via the
SONET data communications channel (DCC).
The backplane DCN Ethernet interface also allows telnet access directly to any
Traverse node in the network through the SONET DCC.
This chapter provides Ethernet and RS-232 information and step-by-step instructions
on how to connect interface cables to the Traverse main backplane DCN Ethernet
(RJ-45) and RS-232 connectors located side-by-side1.
1
RS-232 and DCN Ethernet (RJ-45) connectors located above 15-pin subminiature main alarm interface
connectors.

Volume 2, Section 4: Traverse System Alarm, Ethernet and Timing Interface Cabling
DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface
DCN Ethernet The DCN Ethernet interface connection is made at the Traverse main backplane. There
and RS-232 also is a RS-232 interface connector on the main backplane for modem dial-up access
Interface to the Traverse node via an external modem2 using a RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter.
This chapter provides pinouts for the DCN Ethernet and RS-232 interfaces and
step-by-step instructions on how to make the connections.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(J5) RS-232
Interface
(RJ-45)
(J4) DCN Ethernet

Interface
(RJ-45)
Figure 4-29 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interfaces
DCN Ethernet The DCN Ethernet and RS-232 interfaces are supported by shielded vertical 8-pin
and RS-232 RJ-45 connectors on the main backplane.
Interface The DCN Ethernet interface is compliant to IEEE 802.3 signal definition for an 8-pin
Pinouts RJ-45 connector. Ethernet signals are bridged to both GCM modules in the Traverse
2
The RS-232 interface can be used for technician access using a DB-9 connector and a null modem cable.

Chapter 3 Traverse System DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface
DCN Ethernet and RS-232 Interface Pinouts
shelf. Only the active GCM has a physical connection to the DCN Ethernet RJ-45
connector. Pinouts for the DCN Ethernet interface are provided in the following table.
Table 4-24 DCN Ethernet Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts
10/100BaseT DCN Ethernet Interface
RJ-45 Connector Pin Wire Color Description
1 Grey ETH_TX+
2 Brown ETH_TX-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 Yellow ETH_RX+
4 Green NC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Red NC
6 Black ETH_RX-
7 Orange NC
8 Blue NC
The RS-232 interface may be used to connect with a modem (DB-25) or PC laptop
(DB-9) using a RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter. The RS-232 interface is compliant to
EIA/TIA–561 signal definition for RS-232 DTE device on an 8-pin RJ-45 connector.
This interface provides serial communication to the active GCM in the Traverse shelf.
Pinouts for the RS-232 interface, including DB-9 and DB-25, are provided in the
following table.
Table 4-25 RS-232 Interface (RJ-45) Pinouts
RS-232 DB-9 and DB-25 Pinouts
RJ-45 Connector Pin Description DB-9 Pin DB-25 Pin
1 DCR 6 6
2 DCD 1 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 3 DTR 4 20
4 GND 5 7
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 RXD 3 3
6 TXD 2 2
7 CTS 8 5
8 RTS 7 4

Required The following equipment and tools are required to make the DCN Ethernet and RS-232
Equipment and interface connections to the Traverse main backplane:
Tools ■ DCN Ethernet interface:
– RJ-45 plugs.
– 4-pair twisted wire (Category 5 Ethernet cable).
– RJ-45 crimp tool and cutter.
–
■ External RS-232 interface:
– RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter (RJ-45 connector on one end and DB-25 connector on
the other) for modem connection.
– RJ-45 plugs.
– 4-pair twisted wire (Category 5 Ethernet cable).
– Modem cable for modem connection.
– RJ-45 crimp tool and cutter.
– External non-Windows™ modem.
DCN Ethernet Follow these steps to complete the DCN Ethernet connection at the main backplane.
Interface
Important: Always wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap
Connection
when making connections to the Traverse main backplane.
Table 4-26 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection
Step Procedure
1 Connect Ethernet cable at the LAN/WAN network device in the central

office. See Step 6 for pinouts.
2 Route the Ethernet cable along the rack rails to the left side of the Traverse
shelf following local procedures.
and Replacing Back Covers,” page 1-7.
4 Bring the Ethernet cable over to the (J4) RJ-45 connector on the main
backplane.
5 Cut the Ethernet cable to the correct length.

DCN Ethernet Interface Connection
Table 4-26 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Strip the cable and terminate on a RJ-45 plug using a crimp tool. RJ-45
pinouts are provided below.
DCN Ethernet RJ-45
Pin# Description
1 ETH_TX+
2 ETH_TX-
3 ETH_RX+
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
4 NC
5 NC
6 ETH_RX-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 NC
8 NC
Figure 4-30 RJ-45 Plug and DCN Ethernet Pinouts
7 Insert the RJ-45 plug into the (J4) RJ-45 connector on the main backplane.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(J4) DCN
Ethernet
Interface
Figure 4-31 Traverse Main Backplane DCN Ethernet Interface

RS-232 Interface Connection
Table 4-26 DCN Ethernet Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
8 Attach one clamp-on ferrite with 2 turns on each cable 6-inches from the
rack. A one half turn is defined as a single pass through the ferrite hole.
Figure 4-32 Clamp-on Ferrite with Two Turns
9 Is there a RS-232 interface connection required?
■ If yes, continue to the next procedure, RS-232 Interface Connection.
■ If no, replace the back cover placing the Ethernet cable through the
cable port provided in the left side of the cover.
10 The DCN Ethernet Interface Connection procedure is complete.
RS-232 Follow these steps to complete the external RS-232 interface connection at the main
Interface backplane for modem dial-up access.
Connection
Important: Always wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap
when making connections to the Traverse main backplane.
Table 4-27 RS-232 Interface Connection
Step Procedure
1 Connect the RJ-45 to DB-25 adapter at the external modem.

2 Connect the Category 5 cable to the RJ-45 side of the RJ-45 to DB-25
adapter. See Step 7 on page 4-47 for pinouts.
3 Route the Category 5 cable from the external modem along the rack rails
to the left side of the Traverse shelf following local procedures.
5 Bring the Category 5 cable over to the (J5) RJ-45 connector on the main
backplane.
6 Cut the Category 5 cable to the correct length.

Table 4-27 RS-232 Interface Connection (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Strip the cable and terminate on a RJ-45 plug using a crimp tool. RS-232
interface pinouts along with DB-9 and DB-25 pinouts are provided below.
DB-9 and DB-25
RS-232 Interface RJ-45
Pinouts
Pin# Description DB-9 Pin DB-25 Pin
1 DCR 6 6
2 DCD 1 8
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 DTR 4 20
4 GND 5 7
5 RXD 3 3
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 TXD 2 2
7 CTS 8 5
8 RTS 7 4
Figure 4-33 RJ-45 Plug and RS-232 Pinouts
8 Insert the RJ-45 plug into the (J5) RJ-45 connector on the main backplane.
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
(J5) RS-232
Interface
(RJ-45)
Figure 4-34 Traverse Main Backplane RS-232 Interface
9 Replace the back cover placing the RS-232 cable through the cable port
provided in the left side of the cover.
10 The RS-232 Interface Connection procedure is completed.


S ECTION 5 P OWER C ABLING
SECTION 5
Contents
Chapter 1
Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
PDAP-2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
PDAP-4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
General:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
PDAP-2S only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
PDAP-4S only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Battery and Battery Return Distribution Cabling Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Grounding the PDAP and Traverse Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Chapter 2
Battery and Battery Return Supply
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
PDAP-2S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
PDAP-4S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
General:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
PDAP-2S only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
PDAP-4S only:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Battery Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Battery Return Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Verify Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Verify Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Volume 2 Section 5 Power Cabling
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 PDAP-2S Back View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Figure 5-3 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-4 Battery Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Figure 5-5 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Bus Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Figure 5-6 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Figure 5-7 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Figure 5-8 Battery Distribution Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Figure 5-9 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Power Terminals . . . . . . . . 5-13
Figure 5-10 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Figure 5-11 PDAP-2S Back View—Chassis Ground Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5-12 PDAP-4S Back View—Chassis Ground Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Figure 5-15 PDAP-2S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-16 PDAP-4S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Figure 5-17 Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs at the PDAP-2S . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-18 Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs at the PDAP-2S . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Figure 5-21 PDAP-2S with Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections . . 5-25
Figure 5-22 PDAP-4S with Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections . . 5-25
List of Tables
Table 5-1 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Table 5-2 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Table 5-3 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cabling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Table 5-4 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Table 5-5 Battery Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Table 5-6 Battery Return Supply Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Table 5-7 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

SECTION 5P OWER CABLING
Chapter 1
Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Introduction The Traverse system is powered by central office battery (–48 VDC). Redundant
central office battery and battery return is connected to the Power Distribution and
Alarm Panel (PDAP). There are two different PDAPs1 used with the Traverse system.
PDAP-2S. The PDAP-2S distributes battery and battery return to up to two Traverse
1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Fuse and visual alarm input connections are
made at the back of the PDAP-2S. Audible, remote visual and audible, fail-safe and
environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main backplane.
PDAP-4S. The PDAP-4S distributes battery and battery return to up to four Traverse
1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Power, fuse, and visual alarm input and output
connections are made at the back of the PDAP-4S. Audible, remote visual and audible,
fail-safe and environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main
backplane. Optional visual alarm external switch connections are available on the
PDAP-4S.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect battery and battery
return distribution cables from the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S to each Traverse shelf in a
single-rack configuration. The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced
in CO installations. In this case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to
review or refer to Appendix B—“Installation and Configuration Checklists,” Power
Cabling Checklist, page 7-16.
1

Volume 2, Section 5: Power Cabling
Power The drawing below diagrams the back of the PDAP-2S.

Distribution Battery Supply
NEG VDC Input
and Alarm
Panel Battery Distribution
Battery Return Supply and

Distribution
Figure 5-1 PDAP-2S Back View
The drawing below diagrams the back of the PDAP-4S.

T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT


Chapter 1 Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make central office battery and
Equipment and battery return connections to the PDAP and each Traverse shelf:
Tools General:
■ 2 battery distribution cables (#8 AWG red wire).
■ 2 battery return distribution cables (#8 AWG black wire).
■ #10 AWG green ground wire (optional).
■ 6 – #8-32 SEMS screws to connect battery and battery return distribution cables to
■ Flat blade screw driver.
■ Diagonal cutters.
■ Crimping tool.
PDAP-2S only:
■ 2 – #10 (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) single-hole copper barrel cable
lugs for battery distribution cables.
■ 2 – #10 (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs for battery distribution cables.
■ 2 – #10 (clearance hole with .625-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable
lugs for the battery return distribution cables.
■ 2 – #10-32 KEP nuts to connect battery distribution cables to the PDAP-2S.
■ 4 – #10-32 KEP nuts to connect the battery return distribution cable to the
PDAP-2S.
■ Wrench with 3/8- and 9/16-inch nut socket.
PDAP-4S only:
■ PDAP-4S only:
■ 2 – #8 (clearance hole with 0.46-inch spacing) single-hole copper barrel cable lugs
for battery distribution cables.
■ 2 – #8 (clearance hole with 0.75-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable lugs
for battery distribution cables.
■ 2 – #8 (clearance hole with 0.46-inch spacing) single-hole copper barrel cable lugs
for battery return distribution cables.
■ 2 – #8 (clearance hole with 0.75-inch spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable lugs
for the battery return distribution cables.
■ 2 – #8-32 KEP nuts to connect battery distribution cables to the PDAP-4S.
■ 2 – #8-32 KEP nuts to connect the battery return distribution cable to the
PDAP-4S.
■ 1 1/4”-20 (clearance hole with .625 spacing) double-hole copper barrel cable lug
for ground terminal connection (optional).
■ Wrench with 5/16- and 7/16-inch nut socket.

Battery and Battery Return Distribution Cabling Procedures
Battery and Battery and battery return distribution cabling procedures are written for both the
Battery Return PDAP-2S and PDAP-4S Please refer to the correct procedures based on the type of
Distribution PDAP installed in the rack:
Cabling ■ PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling, page 5-4.
Procedures ■ PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling, page 5-7.
■ PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cabling, page 5-9.
■ PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling, page 5-13.
PDAP-2S The PDAP-2S distributes central office battery to up to two Traverse 1600 or Traverse
Battery 2000 shelves in a rack.
Distribution
Cabling WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the
PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
to avoid personal injury.

(ESD) wrist strap when making cable connections to the PDAP and
Traverse main backplane.
Important: Complete battery and battery return distribution cabling

before bringing central office battery and battery return supply to the
PDAP-2S.
Follow these steps to connect battery distribution cables from the PDAP-2S to a
Traverse shelf.
Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Battery (-48VDC_A and -48VDC_B) terminals are located on the same place on the
Traverse 1600 main backplane.
Table 5-1 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP-2S. Please refer
to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 2—“Removing
2 Remove the back cover from the first Traverse shelf in the rack. Please
refer to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers” for detailed instructions.
3 Use a crimping tool to attach a single-hole copper barrel cable lug to one
end of an 8 AWG red wire for the battery distribution cable.

PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling
Table 5-1 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
4 Remove the KEP nut from the battery "A" distribution power terminal,
position A1 (shelf 1).
Battery “B” Distribution Battery “A” Distribution
Figure 5-3 PDAP-2S Battery Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery "A" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-2S

are: position A1 (shelf 1) and position A2 (shelf 2). Battery "B"
distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-2S are: position B1
(shelf 1) and position B2 (shelf 2).
5 Place the single-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "A"
distribution power terminal (position A1). Replace and tighten the nut.
6 Route the battery "A" distribution cable to the left side of the PDAP-2S
and down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.
7 Bring the battery "A" distribution cable through the bottom cable port of
the shelf and over to the –48VDC_A power terminals on the Traverse main
backplane to determine the length of the cable.
-48VDC_A -48VDC_B
Figure 5-4 Battery Distribution Cable Connections

Step Procedure
8 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery distribution cable to the correct
length.
9 Use a crimping tool to attach a double-hole copper barrel cable lug to the
end of the battery distribution cable.
10 Remove the SEMS screws from the –48VDC_A power terminals.
11 Place the battery distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug over the
–48VDC_A power terminals on the main backplane. Replace and tighten
the SEMS screws.
12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for the battery "B" distribution cable. Connect
the battery distribution cable to battery "B" distribution power terminals
(position B1) at the PDAP-2S and connect the cable to the –48VDC_B
power terminal on the main backplane.
13 Are there additional Traverse shelves in the rack?
■ If yes, repeat Steps 1 through 12 for each Traverse shelf.
14 Continue to the next procedure, PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution
Cabling.

PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling
PDAP-2S The PDAP-2S distributes central office battery return to up to two Traverse 1600 or
Battery Return Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Follow these steps to connect battery return
Distribution distribution cables from the PDAP-2S to a shelf.
Cabling Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Table 5-2 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Use a crimping tool to attach a double-hole copper barrel cable lug to one
end of an 8 AWG black wire for the battery return distribution cable.
2 The PDAP-2S provides battery return A and B distribution terminal
lugs1 2. Remove the KEP nuts from the battery return terminal lug, position
A1 (shelf 1).
Battery Return Bus Bars
B A
Battery Return "A" 2 1 Battery Return "A"

Supply Terminal Distribution Terminal
2 1
Lugs Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (right side view)
1 2 Battery Return "B"

Battery Return "B"
Supply Terminal
Distribution Terminal 1 2
Lugs
Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (left side side view)
Figure 5-5 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Bus Bar
Note: PDAP-2S battery return distribution terminal lug positions on the

bus bar are: position A1 (shelf 1), position A2 (shelf 2).
3 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return bus bar
lugs (position A1). Replace and tighten the KEP nuts.
4 Route the battery “A” return distribution cable to the left side of the
PDAP-2S and down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.

Table 5-2 PDAP-2S Battery Return Distribution Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
5 Bring the battery return distribution cable through the bottom cable port of
the shelf and over to the RETURN_A power terminals on the Traverse
main backplane to determine the length of the cable.
Battery Return
Distribution Bus Bars
B A
RETURN_A RETURN_B
RETURN_A RETURN_B
(optional shared RETURN)
Figure 5-6 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection
6 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery return distribution cable to the
correct length.
end of the battery return distribution cable.
8 Remove SEMS screws from the RETURN_A power terminals.
9 Place the battery return distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug
over the RETURN_A power terminals. Replace and tighten the SEMS
screws.
10 Repeat Steps 1 through 9 to connect battery return “B” distribution cable.
Connect the battery return cable from position B1 on the PDAP-2S battery
return distribution bus bar to the Traverse RETURN_B power terminals.

Step Procedure

■ If yes, repeat Steps 1 through 10 for the second shelf.
12 The PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling procedure is complete.
1
The PDAP-2S has four sets of battery return A and battery return B distribution terminal lugs, only two
sets are used to distribute separate battery return A and B to shelves 1 and 2.
2
An optional method of battery return distribution cabling is to share common distribution power terminals
at the PDAP-2S and at the Traverse main backplane.
PDAP-4S The PDAP-4S distributes central office battery to up to four Traverse 1600 or Traverse
Battery 2000 shelves in a rack.
Distribution
Cabling WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to the
PDAP or central office battery source before beginning this procedure
to avoid personal injury.

Important: Complete battery and battery return distribution cabling

before bringing central office battery and battery return supply to the
PDAP-4S.

Follow these steps to connect battery distribution cables from the PDAP-4S to a
Traverse shelf.
Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Table 5-3 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP-4S. Please refer
to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 2—“Removing
2 Remove the back cover from the first Traverse shelf in the rack. Please
refer to Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
2—“Removing and Replacing Back Covers” for detailed instructions.
end of an 8 AWG red wire for the battery distribution cable.
4 Remove the KEP nut from the battery "A" distribution power terminal,
position A1 (shelf 1).
Battery “B” Distribution Battery “A” Distribution
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-7 PDAP-4S Battery Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery "A" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-4S

are: position A1 (shelf 1), A2 (shelf 2), A3 (shelf 3), and position A4 (shelf
4). Battery "B" distribution power terminal positions on the PDAP-4S are:
position B1 (shelf 1), B2 (shelf 2), B3 (shelf 3), and position B4 (shelf 4).
6 Route the battery "A" distribution cable to the left side of the PDAP-4S
and down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.

Step Procedure
7 Bring the battery "A" distribution cable through the bottom cable port of
the shelf and over to the –48VDC_A power terminals on the Traverse main
backplane to determine the length of the cable.
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
-48VDC_A -48VDC_B
Figure 5-8 Battery Distribution Cable Connections
8 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery distribution cable to the correct
length.
end of the battery distribution cable.
10 Remove the SEMS screws from the –48VDC_A power terminals.
11 Place the battery distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug over the
–48VDC_A power terminals on the main backplane. Replace and tighten
the SEMS screws.
12 Repeat Steps 1 through 11 for the battery "B" distribution cable. Connect
the battery distribution cable to battery "B" distribution power terminals
(position B1) at the PDAP-4S and connect the cable to the –48VDC_B
power terminal on the main backplane.

Step Procedure

■ If yes, repeat Steps 1 through 12 for each Traverse shelf.
14 Continue to the next procedure, PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution
Cabling.

PDAP-4S The PDAP-4S distributes central office battery return to up to four Traverse 1600 or
Battery Return Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Follow these steps to connect battery return
Distribution distribution cables from the PDAP-4S to a shelf.
Cabling Note: Traverse 2000 main backplane graphics are used in the following procedure.
Table 5-4 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling
Step Procedure
end of an 8 AWG black wire for the battery return distribution cable.
2 Remove the KEP nut from the battery return "A" distribution power
terminal, position A1 (shelf 1).
Battery Return “B” Distribution Battery Return “A” Distribution
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-9 PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Power Terminals
Note: Battery return "A" distribution power terminal positions on the

PDAP-4S are: position A1 (shelf 1), A2 (shelf 2), A3 (shelf 3), and
position A4 (shelf 4). Battery return "B" distribution power terminal
positions on the PDAP-2S are: position B1 (shelf 1), B2 (shelf 2), B3
(shelf 3), and position B4 (shelf 4).
4 Route the battery return "A" distribution cable to the left side of the
PDAP-4S and down the rack rails to the first Traverse shelf.

Step Procedure
5 Bring the battery return distribution cable through the bottom cable port of
the shelf and over to the RETURN_A power terminals on the Traverse
main backplane to determine the length of the cable.
Battery Return
Distribution Cables
B A
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
RETURN_A RETURN_B
RETURN_A RETURN_B
(optional shared RETURN)
Figure 5-10 Battery Return Distribution Cable Connection
6 Use diagonal cutters to cut the battery return distribution cable to the
correct length.
end of the battery return distribution cable.
8 Remove SEMS screws from the RETURN_A power terminals.
9 Place the battery return distribution double-hole copper barrel cable lug
over the RETURN_A power terminals. Replace and tighten the SEMS
screws.

Grounding the PDAP and Traverse Shelf
Step Procedure
10 Repeat Steps 1 through 9 to connect battery return “B” distribution cable.

Connect the battery return cable from position B1 on the PDAP-4S battery
return distribution terminal to the Traverse RETURN_B power terminals.
■ If yes, repeat Steps 1 through 10 for the second shelf.
12 The PDAP-4S Battery Return Distribution Cabling procedure is complete.
Grounding the The PDAP-2S/PDAP-4S, Traverse shelves and fan tray holder are grounded to the rack
PDAP and using thread-forming screws and conductive plated rack adapters (required for 23-inch
Traverse Shelf rack installation). No additional grounding procedures are required when installed in a
properly grounded telco rack.
There is a chassis ground location on the back of the PDAP-2S and the side of the
PDAP-4S for connecting an optional grounding wire. Connect the grounding wire to
the PDAP and to a confirmed source of earth ground.
Chassis Ground
Figure 5-11 PDAP-2S Back View—Chassis Ground Location
Chassis Ground
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-12 PDAP-4S Back View—Chassis Ground Location

Grounding the PDAP and Traverse Shelf

SECTION 5P OWER CABLING
Chapter 2
Battery and Battery Return Supply
Introduction The Traverse system is powered by central office battery (–48 VDC). Redundant
central office (CO) battery and battery return is connected to the Power Distribution
and Alarm Panel (PDAP). There are two different PDAPs1 used with the Traverse
system.
PDAP-2S. The PDAP-2S distributes battery and battery return to up to two Traverse
1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Fuse and visual alarm input connections are
made at the back of the PDAP-2S. Audible, remote visual and audible, fail-safe and
environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main backplane.
PDAP-4S. The PDAP-4S distributes battery and battery return to up to four Traverse
1600 or Traverse 2000 shelves in a rack. Power, fuse and visual alarm input
connections are made at the back of the PDAP-4S. Audible, remote visual and audible,
fail-safe and environmental alarm connections are made at the Traverse main
backplane. Optional visual alarm external switch connections are available on the
PDAP-4S.
This chapter provides step-by-step instructions on how to connect:
■ Battery cables from the central office power supply to the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S.
■ Battery return cables from the central office battery return supply to the PDAP-2S
or PDAP-4S.
The instructions may be too detailed if you are experienced in CO installations. In this
case, scan the topic labels in the left margin for tasks to review or refer to Appendix
B—“Installation and Configuration Checklists,” Power Cabling Checklist, page 7-16.
1

Power The drawing below diagrams the back of the PDAP-2S.

Distribution Battery Supply
and Alarm NEG VDC Input
Panel Battery Distribution
Battery Return Supply and

Distribution
The drawing below diagrams the back of the PDAP-4S.

T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT


Chapter 2 Battery and Battery Return Supply
Battery Supply Cabling
Required The following equipment and tools are required to make central office battery and
Equipment and battery return supply connections to the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S:
Tools General:
■ 2 battery supply cables (up to #1/0 AWG red wire2).
■ 2 battery return supply cables (up to #1/0 AWG black wire2).
■

■ Crimping tool.
■ Diagonal cutters.
■ Volt Ohm Meter (VOM).
PDAP-2S only:
■ 4 double-hole cooper barrel cable lugs (3/8-inch with 1-inch spacing) for battery
and battery return supply cables.
■ 8 – 3/8-16 nuts to connect battery and battery return supply cables at the PDAP-2S.
■ 8 – 3/8-inch lock washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables at the
PDAP-2S.
■ Wrench with 9/16-inch nut socket.
PDAP-4S only:
■ 4 double-hole cooper barrel cable lugs (1/4-inch with 3/4-inch spacing) for battery
■ 8 – 1/4-20 nuts to connect battery and battery return supply cables at the PDAP-4S.
■ 8 – 1/4-inch lock washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables at the
PDAP-4S.
■ 8 – 1/4-inch flat washers to connect battery and battery return supply cables at the
PDAP-4S.
■ Wrench with 7/16-inch nut socket.
Battery Supply Battery "A" and "B" supply cables are run from the central office battery distribution
Cabling fuse bay (BDFB), or other central office battery source, to the PDAP. Complete battery
and battery return distribution cabling before bringing central office battery and battery
return supply cables to the PDAP.
Follow these steps to connect battery supply cables to the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected to

central office battery source before beginning this procedure to avoid
personal injury.
2
1/0 AWG battery and battery return supply cables are required for power distribution to four Traverse
shelves in a rack. Refer to your local electrical code for requirements.


Table 5-5 Battery Supply Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Run battery "A" and "B" supply cables (1/0 AWG red wire) from the
BDFB across the horizontal cable rack and down the rack rails to the
PDAP following local procedures.
2 Remove the protective cover from the back of the PDAP. Please refer to
and Replacing Back Covers” for detailed instructions.
3 Bring the cables to the battery "A" and "B" supply PDAP-2S bus bars or
PDAP-4S terminal studs.
Battery "B" Supply Bus Bar Battery "A" Supply Bus Bar
NEG VDC Input NEG VDC Input
Battery "B" NEG VDC Battery "A" NEG VDC

Input Terminal Lugs Input Terminal Lugs
(left side view) (right side view)
Figure 5-15 PDAP-2S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs
Battery “B” Supply Terminals Battery “A” Supply Terminals
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-16 PDAP-4S Battery Supply Terminal Lugs
4 Cut the battery supply cables to the correct length.

5 Use a crimping tool to attach double-hole copper barrel cable lugs to the
ends of the battery supply cables.
6 Remove the nuts and lock washers from the PDAP battery "A" and "B"
NEG VDC input terminal lugs.

Table 5-5 Battery Supply Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
7 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "A" NEG
VDC input terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers and tighten nuts.
8 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery "B" NEG
VDC input lugs. Replace the lock washers and tighten the nuts.
9 Continue to the next procedure, Battery Return Supply Cabling.

Battery Return Supply Cabling
Battery Return Battery return supply cables are run from the central office battery return bus bar, or
Supply Cabling other central office battery return source, to the PDAP. Follow these steps to connect
battery return supply cables to the PDAP.
Table 5-6 Battery Return Supply Cabling
Step Procedure
1 Run battery return “A” and “B” supply cables (1/0 AWG black wire) from
the battery return supply across the horizontal cable rack and down the
rails to the PDAP battery return PDAP-2S bus bars or PDAP-4S terminal
studs following local procedures.
Battery Return Bus Bars
B A
Battery Return "A" 2 1 Battery Return "A"

Supply Terminal Distribution Terminal
2 1
Lugs Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (right side view)
1 2 Battery Return "B"

Battery Return "B"
Supply Terminal
Distribution Terminal 1 2
Lugs
Lugs
Battery Return Bus Bar (left side side view)
Figure 5-17 Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs at the PDAP-2S
Battery “B” Return Supply Terminals Battery “A” Return Supply Terminals
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-18 Battery Return Supply Terminal Lugs at the PDAP-2S
2 Cut the battery return supply cables to the correct length.

3 Use a crimping tool to attach double-hole copper barrel cable lugs to the
end of the battery return supply cables.
4 Remove the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S only), and nuts from the
PDAP battery return “A” and “B” RTN bus bars.
5 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return “A”
RTN terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S
only), and tighten the nuts.

Battery Return Supply Cabling
Table 5-6 Battery Return Supply Cabling (continued)
Step Procedure
6 Place the double-hole copper barrel cable lug on the battery return “B”
RTN terminal lugs. Replace the lock washers, flat washers (PDAP-4S
only), and tighten the nuts.
7 Attach two clamp-on ferrites around A feed and two ferrites around B feed
(-48 and RTN) cables 6-inches from the rack.
8 Important: Use a Volt Ohm Meter (VOM) to verify continuity of battery
9 Replace the protective cover on the back of the PDAP. Please refer to
10 Continue to the next procedure Connect Supply Cables to the Central
Office Source.

Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source
Connect Follow these steps to connect battery and battery return supply cables to the central
Supply Cables office source.
to the Central
Office Source WARNING! Use extreme caution when working with battery and
battery return supply cables. Remove all metal jewelry when working
with power circuits.
WARNING! Complete continuity testing before connecting battery

and battery return cables to the central office source.
Table 5-7 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source
Step Procedure
1 WARNING! Before connecting the supply cables, go to the front of

the PDAP and verify that all PDAP-2S circuit breakers are in the OFF
position or PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders are empty. Also verify the
GMT fuse positions are empty or contain dummy fuses.
GMT Fuse Positions
A1 B1
A2 B2
TPA Fuse Holders
GMT Fuse Positions

2 Connect battery and battery return supply cables (at the BDFB and battery
return source) following local procedures or arrange for a local central
office technician to make these connections.

Verify Polarity
Table 5-7 Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source (continued)
Step Procedure
3 At the battery filter, attach one clamp-on ferrite around A feed and one
ferrite around B feed (_in and _out) cables 6-inches from the filter.
4 The Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source procedure is
complete.
Verify Polarity Confirm polarity between the battery and battery return supply connections at the
PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S.
WARNING! Go to the front of the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S and verify

that all PDAP-2S circuit breakers are in the OFF position or
PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders are empty before verifying polarity or
voltage.
NEG VDC Input NEG VDC Input
Battery "B"
NEG VDC Battery "A"
Input Lugs NEG VDC
Input Lugs
Battery "B" Supply Bus Bar
(Left Side View)
Battery Return
4 3
"B" Supply Lugs 2 1
4 3 Battery Return 2 1
Battery Return "B" Bus Bar "A" Supply Lugs Battery Return Bus Bar
(Left Side View) (Right Side View)
Figure 5-21 PDAP-2S with Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections
Battery “A” Supply and Return Terminals Battery “A” Supply and Return Terminals
T T
P P
A A
GMT GMT
Figure 5-22 PDAP-4S with Battery and Battery Return Supply Connections

Verify Voltage
Verify Voltage Use a VOM to measure the voltage present at the NEG VDC "A" and "B" input lugs on
the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S. Voltage reading must be between –48 and –60 VDC.

S ECTION 6 S TART - UP AND M ODULE P LACEMENT
SECTION 7START -UP AND MODULE PLACEMENT
Contents
Chapter 1
Start-up and Initial Configuration
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Traverse Network Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Traverse Network Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Optional Node Initial Configuration Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Power up the Traverse Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Module Placement and Initial Configuration Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Place the Active GCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
CLI Commands and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Traverse Node Initial Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Place Standby GCM and All Modules in the Traverse Node. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
TransAccess 100 Mux Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
PDAP LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Front Inlet Fan Module and LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Fan Tray Holder and LED Indicators. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Module LED Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Visual Status During and After Start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
GCM LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
DS1, DS3, and VT Switch Module Port LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
OC-N Module Port LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
GbE and Fast Ethernet Port LED Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Chapter 2
Module Placement
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Module Placement Guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Module Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Insert Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38

Volume 2 Section 6 Start-up and Module Placement
List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Traverse Network—In-Band Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Figure 6-2 Traverse Network—Out-of-Band Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-3 PDAP-2S Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-4 PDAP-4S TPA Fuse Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-5 PDAP-2S LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-6 PDAP-4S LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Figure 6-7 Front Inlet Fan Module with LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Figure 6-8 Fan Tray Holder with LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Figure 6-9 Module LED Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
Figure 6-10 Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Module Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Figure 6-11 Fiber Optic Backplane Housing A and B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Figure 6-12 MPX Connector on Optical Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
Figure 6-13 Module Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Figure 6-14 Traverse Shelf with Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Figure 6-15 Module Tabs in the Locked Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
List of Tables
Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Table 6-2 Optional Node Initial Configuration Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Table 6-3 CLI Command Descriptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Table 6-4 Initial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Table 6-5 Place Standby GCM and All Other Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Table 6-6 PDAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Table 6-7 Front Inlet Fan Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Table 6-8 Fan Tray Holder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Table 6-9 Power and Active/Standby—GCM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Table 6-10 Power and Active/Standby—All Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Table 6-11 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-12 Timing Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Table 6-13 Ethernet Link (OSS and Craft 10/100BaseT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table 6-14 Electrical Module/Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Table 6-15 Optical Module/Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Table 6-16 GbE and Fast Ethernet Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Table 6-17 General Control Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Table 6-18 VT Switch 2688 Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Table 6-19 Service Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Table 6-20 Module Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
Table 6-21 Redundancy Rules for GCM Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
Table 6-22 Clean MPX Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
Table 6-23 Insert a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39

Chapter 1
Start-up and Initial Configuration
Introduction The Traverse shelf (node)1 is ready for power-up after all hardware is installed (PDAP2,
shelf, and front inlet fan tray with integrated air ramp), cabling (network, alarm, timing,
Ethernet, power), and polarity and voltage testing is complete. This chapter provides
instructions for start-up and initial configuration of a Traverse shelf:
■ Traverse Network Management, page 6-2.
■ Traverse Network Examples, page 6-3.
■ Optional Node Initial Configuration Information, page 6-7.
■ Power up the Traverse Shelf, page 6-9.
■ Place the Active GCM, page 6-10.
■ Traverse Node Initial Configuration, page 6-11.
■ Place Standby GCM and All Modules in the Traverse Node, page 6-14.
■ TransAccess 100 Mux Initial Configuration, page 6-15.
Light emitting diodes (LEDs) are on the front panel of the PDAP, front inlet fan
module, fan tray holder3 and each Traverse module. These LEDs provide a visual status
at power-up. This chapter provides information on each of these LEDs and what they
indicate regarding the general operational condition of the node:
■ PDAP LED Indicators, page 6-16.
■ Front Inlet Fan Module and LED Indicators, page 6-17.
■ Fan Tray Holder and LED Indicators, page 6-18.
■ Module LED Locations, page 6-19.
1
The information in this chapter applies to both the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelves.
2
PDAP-2S, PDAP-4S or other Power Distribution Unit (PDU).
3
This fan tray holder refers to the pre-Release 1.4 design. Release 1.4 introduces a redesigned fan tray
holder with integrated air ramp. In this redesign, the LEDs are on the front inlet fan module.

Volume 2, Section 6: Start-up and Module Placement
Traverse Network Management
Traverse Data Communications Network. Traverse systems provide a Data Communications

Network Network (DCN) that can be used to connect a Traverse node to the TransNav system
Management (or to another EMS) and to other remote management devices. The DCN is provided by
a 10/100BaseT Ethernet interface (RJ-45 connector). The RJ-45 signal connections are
bridged to both the primary and secondary GCMs. This enables the TransNav
Management System to always talk to the active GCM, even after a protection
switching.
A network of Traverse nodes can be managed over the service providers data
communications network as long as at least one Traverse node is directly connected to
that network through the Traverse DCN Ethernet interface. Traverse nodes that have no
direct connection to a DCN can communicate with the EMS indirectly, through any
Traverse node that is connected to the DCN. A Traverse node that handles such relay
functions is referred to as the Management Gateway Node (MGN). MGNs and
non-gateway nodes communicate using the Turin Intelligent Control Plane via the
SONET/SDH Data Communications Channel (DCC).
A Traverse node that is not directly connected to a DCN is able to learn a route to
Traverse nodes on the DCN without any explicit local provisioning of routing
information as long as it is connected via the Turin Control Plane to one or more
gateway Traverse nodes. Service providers must use static IP routes to enable devices
on the DCN to reach both gateway and non-gateway Traverse nodes.
Management Gateway Nodes. The TransNav Management System connects to
nodes over the service provider’s TCP/IP data communications network. Access a
network through one or more nodes that are designated as management gateways.
Intelligent Control Plane. A Control Plane is a logical set of connections between
Traverse nodes through which those nodes exchange control and management
information. This control and management information can be carried either in-band or
out-of-band.
■ In-band management: The data communications channel (DCC) carries the control
and management data. Using an open shortest path first (OSPF) algorithm, all links
share the management traffic from the management gateway node over the data
communications channel (DCC). See Traverse Network Examples, page 6-3 for a
descriptive illustration.
■ Out-of-band management: The TransNav Management System is directly
connected by an Ethernet 10/100BaseT connection to each node. See Traverse
Network Examples, page 6-3 for a descriptive illustration.
Control Plane Domain. A set of nodes completely interconnected by a control plane
is called a Control Plane Domain. One TransNav Management System can manage up
to 50 nodes in a single Control Plane Domain, or multiple domains (management
domain).

Chapter 1 Start-up and Initial Configuration
Traverse Network Examples
Traverse Figure 6-1 depicts an example Traverse network using In-Band management. Example
Network IP addresses are shown at the TransNav management server, Management Gateway
Examples Node (MGN)4 and Traverse nodes within the same Control Plane domain.
Backplane Control Plane Domain:

DCN 10.0.2.x
Ethernet
interface
Node IP: Node IP: Node IP:
10.0.2.1 10.0.2.2 10.0.2.3
DCN Management
Gateway Node
(MGN)
DCC DCC
Management Server
10.0.0.1 10.0.0.2 Backplane DCN Backplane DCN IP: GCM A IP:
Gateway IP and 10.0.1.2 10.1.1.1
EMS Gateway IP
Backplane DCN Mask:
for MGN:
255.255.255.0
10.0.1.1
EMS Mask IP for MGN:
255.255.255.0
10.1.1.2
Figure 6-1 Traverse Network—In-Band Management
4
The MGN is the Gateway Network Element (GNE).

Traverse Network Examples
Figure 6-2 depicts an example Traverse network using Out-of-Band management.

Example IP addresses are shown at the TransNav management server and Traverse
nodes within two different DCN networks, but within the same Control Plane domain.
Note that the EMS gateway and EMS mask IP addresses are not shown, but they would
have to be configured for each node since each is a gateway node.
Control Plane Domain:

10.1.4.x
Backplane
DCN
Ethernet
10
/24
.1
Node IP: interface Node IP: Node IP: Node IP:
3.3
.2
.3
10.1.4.1 10.1.4.2 10.1.4.3 10.1.4.4
.1.
/2
4
10
Node A Node B Node C Node D
Backplane DCN IP: Backplane DCN IP: Backplane DCN IP:

Backplane DCN IP:
10.1.2.1 10.1.2.2 10.1.3.2
10.1.3.1
Backplane DCN Gateway IP:
Backplane DCN Gateway IP:
10.1.2.3
10.1.3.3
Backplane DCN Mask:
172.168.1.1/24 Backplane DCN Mask:
255.255.255.0
255.255.255.0
San Francisco DCN
Los Angeles DCN
10.1.2.x
DCN 10.1.3.x
Management Server
172.168.1.2
Figure 6-2 Traverse Network—Out-of-Band Management

Required The following equipment and tools are required:

Equipment and ■ Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap.
Tools ■ MPX cleaning kit5.
■ 1 or 2 General Control Modules (GCMs).
■ The number and combination of modules is based on your network requirements
and physical cabling at the Traverse main and fiber optic backplanes. Please refer
to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and
Guidelines,” page 7-1 for additional information.
■ A PC or laptop with Hyperterminal or other VT-100 terminal emulation software.
■ A standard straight-through serial port cable with:
– 9-pin RS-232-C (DB-9) male connector on one end (to connect to the General
Control Module).
– 9-pin or 25-pin RS-232-C (DB-9) connector to match the connector on your
PC.
■ Volume 5, TransNav Management System, Section 7—CLI User’s Guide.
■ Initial configuration and IP address information6 required to bring the Traverse
shelf into service is provided in the following table.
Please refer to Figure 6-1 Traverse Network—In-Band Management on page 6-3
and Figure 6-2 Traverse Network—Out-of-Band Management on page 6-4 for
example network IP address settings.
Important: All backplane, GCMA, GCMB IP, Control Plane domain

subnetworks must be unique.
Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration Information
Information Type Description
Node ID The Node ID is the node name used to access CLI

node-level commands after initial configuration. It is also
the node name displayed in the TransNav GUI at the
bottom of the Shelf View window.
Node IP Traverse node IP address; this is also known as the Router
IP in a data network environment.
5
Required to clean fiber optic cable MPX connectors and optical module MPX connectors.
6
Static IP address information is provided by your local network administrator and is required for
management purposes. Traverse node IP addresses should be allocated from the same domain.

Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration Information (continued)
Backplane DCN IP Backplane DCN IP address for the DCN Ethernet interface
located on the Traverse main backplane. The backplane
DCN IP address must be entered to set up communication
with the TransNav system over the DCN. The backplane
DCN Ethernet interface IP address is provided by your
local network administrator based on the network topology
and should be unique throughout the Traverse network
Backplane DCN The Backplane DCN mask is an IP mask required for
Mask routing purposes over the backplane Ethernet DCN
interface.
Backplane DCN Backplane DCN gateway IP address is required to set up
Gateway communication with the TransNav Management System
and to manage the network over the DCN. The Backplane
DCN gateway address is required when there is a router
between the TransNav server and the node.

Optional Node Initial Configuration Information
Optional Node Optional initial node configuration is listed in the following table. This information
Initial may be entered via the TransNav CLI after initial configuration.
Configuration
Information Table 6-2 Optional Node Initial Configuration Information
EMS IP and Mask EMS IP address and mask for the TransNav server are
required only if the EMS server is located across a
router.
EMS Gateway EMS gateway IP address is required only when there
is a router between the node and the TransNav server;
and the server is on a different subnet.
GCMA and GCMB External IP addresses and masks are required to enable
IP and Mask the GCM Ethernet interface (RJ-45 connectors) for
technician access using a TransNav client workstation
to access the TransNav server over the DCC network.
The IP addresses set for the GCM Ethernet interface
and the IP address set for the technician’s PC must be
on the same network. The subnetwork must not
conflict with the Backplane DCN IP address.
Note: Use the active GCM RS-232 interface for
technician access using the CLI. The GCM RS-232
interface provides access to:
■ Node-level CLI commands to a local node.
■ Node-level CLI commands, one node at a time to
any other node in the Control Plane domain, via
remote login.
■ Domain-level CLI commands via Telnet session
or remote login to the TransNav server.
GCMA and GCMB Gateway IP addresses are required only when there is
Gateway Address a router between the GCM Ethernet interface and the
technicians’ PC. In the typical case, there is not a
router between the GCM and the technician’s PC.

Optional Node Initial Configuration Information
Table 6-2 Optional Node Initial Configuration Information (continued)
Network Time NTP IP primary server address may be entered to

Protocol (NTP) establish the NTP source1 required for Time of Day
stamp. The TransNav system uses the NTP source to
provide an accurate Time of Day stamp for
performance monitoring, alarm and event logs. A
secondary NTP IP server address is optional. This
information can be entered via the TransNav GUI or
CLI after initial configuration. Please refer to
Volume 5, TransNav Management System,
Section 1—Overview, Installation and Administration,
Chapter 3—“Network Management,” NTP Sources in
a Traverse Network, page 1-18 for more information.
Locale This is the time zone locale for the node. There are
five valid time zone locales for the United States:
America/LosAngeles, America/Phoenix,
America/Denver, America/Chicago,
America/New_York. A complete listing of time zone
locales world-wide is available at the following Web
site: http://www.bsdi.com/xdate. This information can
be entered via the TransNav GUI or CLI after initial
configuration.
Location Location allows you to identify the physical location
of the node. This information can be entered via the
TransNav GUI or CLI after initial configuration.
1
Turin recommends using the TransNav server as the primary NTP source if you do not already
have a NTP source defined. If no primary NTP source is configured the TransNav system will
default to the TransNav server as the NTP primary NTP source. Please refer the Volume 5,
TransNav Management System, Section 1—Overview, Installation and Administration, Chapter
8—“TransNav Server Administration Procedures” for information on how to activate NTP server
on the TransNav server. The secondary NTP IP address is optional. Also refer to Chapter
3—“Network Management,” NTP Sources in a Traverse Network, page 1-18 for information
about setting up the node NTP source in different network topologies.

Power up the Traverse Shelf
Power up the
Traverse Shelf Important: Switch on power to Traverse shelves and fan trays at the
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP) before placing any modules
in the shelf.
Important: Only switch on PDAP-2S circuit breakers or insert operable

fuses in the PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders for the shelves installed in the
rack. All other PDAP-2S circuit breakers must be left in the OFF position
or PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders must be left empty.
Battery “A” and “B” PDAP-2S circuit breakers or PDAP-4S TPA fuses are located on
the PDAP for each shelf in the rack (A1 through A4 and B1 through B4). Turn power
on to each shelf in the rack beginning with A1 and B1 positions.
Battery “A” Battery “B”

Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers
A1 through A2 B1 through B2
Figure 6-3 PDAP-2S Circuit Breakers
TPA Fuse Holders
Figure 6-4 PDAP-4S TPA Fuse Holders
Important: The input power and critical alarm LEDs display on the
PDAP indicating no modules are placed in the Traverse shelf, refer to
PDAP LED Indicators, page 6-16 for additional information. The front
inlet fan module power LED is green, refer to Front Inlet Fan Module
and LED Indicators, page 6-17 for more information. For the
pre-Release 1.4 fan tray holder, refer to Fan Tray Holder and LED
Indicators, page 6-18.

Module Placement and Initial Configuration Sequence
Module Place modules and complete initial configuration in the following sequence:
Placement and ■ Place active GCM, page 6-10.
Initial ■ Complete initial configuration, page 6-11.
Configuration ■ Place standby GCM, wait for synchronization with active GCM to complete,
Sequence page 6-14.
■ Place remaining modules, page 6-14.
Place the Place a GCM in Traverse slot GCMA or GCMB, this becomes the active GCM.
Active GCM
Important: Always wear a properly grounded ESD wrist strap when
handling or working with Traverse modules.
Please refer to these procedures for detailed information in Chapter 2—“Module

Placement”:
■ Insert Module, page 6-38.
■ Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connectors, page 6-34 if you are placing a GCM with
integrated optics (GCM OC-12/STM-4 or GCM OC-48/STM-16).
Important: The GCM power LED is steady on “green”, indicating that

the GCM has power. The steady on “green” Active/Standby LED indicates
that it is the active GCM module. Initial configuration is done through the
active GCM via the Command Line Interface (CLI).
CLI Commands Please refer to the Volume 5, TransNav Management System, Section 7—CLI User’s
and Guide for a complete explanation of commands and usage. The following conventions
Conventions are used in these procedure tables and are the same as listed in the CLI User’s Guide.
Table 6-3 CLI Command Descriptions
Command Description
Boldface Boldface indicates commands and keywords that are

entered literally as shown.
Italics Italics indicate arguments; you supply these values.

Traverse Node Initial Configuration
Traverse Node A network of Traverse nodes can be managed over the service provider’s data
Initial communications network (DCN) via the TransNav Management System as long as one
Configuration Traverse node is directly connected to that network through the backplane DCN
Ethernet interface. This node is referred to as the Traverse Management Gateway Node
(MGN). Traverse nodes that have no direct connection to the DCN can communicate
with the TransNav system indirectly, through the MGN, via the SONET data
communications channel.
Initial configuration is done using the CLI and must be completed to enter required IP
address information. Please refer to Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration
Information, page 6-5 and Table 6-2 Optional Node Initial Configuration Information,
page 6-7 for detailed information.
Important: Release 1.3 TransNav CLI commands are used in the

following procedures. TransNav system software is backward compatible
with the previous major release.
WARNING! Do not change the node ID or node IP address once these

are set during initial configuration. Changing the node ID or node IP
address will affect service.
Follow these steps to complete initial configuration.
Table 6-4 Initial Configuration
Step Procedure
1 Connect a serial port cable to the active GCM RS-232 interface (DB-9
connector) and to your PC or laptop. Refer to figure 6-9 on page 6-19 for
the location of the RS-232 interface on the faceplate of the GCM.
2 Power-up your PC or laptop.
3 Start VT-100 emulation software.
4 Open your terminal emulation session.
5 Enter the correct parameters settings for the communications port (COM1
or COM2):
Baud Rate: 9600
Data Bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop Bits: 1
Flow Control: None
6 Important: You may have to type <Enter> several times to establish the
session and to receive the Turin logo and session prompt.
Your terminal responds with the Turin logo.
Please type CLI to start a new session...

Table 6-4 Initial Configuration (continued)
Step Procedure
7 To logon to the CLI:

Type: CLI<Enter>
8 The CLI responds:
Login:
Type: admin<Enter>
Password:
Type: admin<Enter>
9 To establish a name (node-id), node IP address (node-ip) for the
Traverse node.
Important: Use alpha-numeric characters only. Do not use punctuation,
spaces, or special characters for the node name (node-id).
Type: exec node commission node-id nodename node-ip
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd<Enter>
10 Restart the node (exec node restart) to set the IP addresses and to
make the node operational.
Type: exec node restart<Enter>
CLI responds: Are you sure you want to execute this
command? [yes|no]:
Type: yes<Enter>
11 To establish backplane DCN Ethernet interface IP address (bp-dcn-ip),
backplane DCN mask (bp-dcn-mask) and backplane DCN gateway IP
address (bp-dcn-gw-ip) for routing purposes:
Type: set node ip bp-dcn-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
bp-dcn-mask aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd bp-dcn-gw-ip
12 To establish EMS IP (ems-ip), EMS mask (ems-mask) and EMS
gateway IP addresses (ems-gw):
Type: set node ip ems-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-mask
aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ems-gw aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd<Enter>
13 To establish a location name for the Traverse node:
Type: set node general location locationname<Enter>
14 To establish the time zone locale for the Traverse node. Please refer to
Table 6-2 Optional Node Initial Configuration Information, page 6-7 for
additional information.
Type: set node general locale localename<Enter>

Table 6-4 Initial Configuration (continued)
Step Procedure
15 To establish primary (ntp-ip-address1) and secondary

(ntp-ip-address2) NTP server IP addresses:
Type: set node ip ntp-ip-address1 aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd
ntp-ip-address2 aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd<Enter>
16 To establish GCM IP addresses1 (gcm-a-ip and gcm-b-ip) and enable
the Ethernet interfaces (RJ-45 connectors) on the GCM modules:
Type: set node ip gcm-a-ip aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd gcm-b-ip
17 Is the PDAP type installed with the node a PDAP-4S?
■ Yes. Go to the next Step.
■ No. You must identify the PDAP-2S (type2) for power distribution and
to report system/environmental alarms.
To establish the PDAP-2S type:
Type: set node env pdap-type type2<Enter>
18 The default login and password of “admin” is used to access the node for
initial configuration. For security reasons, you should change the admin
user password after initial system commissioning is complete. Please refer
to Volume 5, TransNav Management System, Section 7—CLI User’s
Guide, Chapter 2—“CLI Quick Reference Guide,” page 7-15 for more
information about the exec user change-password command.
19 Restart the node (exec node restart) to activate the IP addresses.
Type: exec node restart<Enter>
CLI responds: Are you sure you want to execute this
command? [yes|no]:
Type: yes<Enter>
20 The Traverse node and active GCM are configured after the restart is
complete.
21 Exit your terminal emulation session.
22 The Initial Configuration procedure is complete.
1
GCM IP addresses are required to enable the GCM Ethernet interfaces (RJ-45 connectors) on the GCM
modules for technician access using a TransNav client workstation to access the TransNav server over
the DCC network. The IP addresses set for the GCM Ethernet interfaces and the IP address set for the
technician’s PC must be on the same network, but must not conflict with the BP-DCN. GCMA/GCMB
gateway IP address information (gcm-a-gw/gcm-b-gw) is set using the set node ip
command only when there is a router between the GCMs and the technician’s PC.

Place Standby GCM and All Modules in the Traverse Node
Place Standby Place the standby GCM and all other modules in the node after initial configuration is
GCM and All complete on the active GCM. Follow these steps to continue placing modules in the
Modules in the shelf.
Traverse Node Please refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning
and Guidelines,” page 7-1 and the following procedures in Chapter 2—“Module
Placement,” page 6-25 for detailed information:
■ Module Placement Guidelines, page 6-30.
■ Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connectors, page 6-34 if placing optical modules.
■ Insert Module, page 6-38.

handling or working with Traverse modules.
Table 6-5 Place Standby GCM and All Other Modules
Step Procedure
1 Place the standby GCM in the remaining GCM slot, GCMA or GCMB.
The Active/Standby LED on the standby GCM flashes amber while it is
synchronizing with the active GCM.
2 Wait for synchronization to complete on the standby GCM. The
Active/Standby LED flashes green indicating that it is the standby GCM
and that synchronization is complete.
3 Place the remaining modules in the Traverse node based on your engineer-
ing work order and the physical cabling at the main and fiber optic back-
planes. Please refer to Chapter 2—“Module Placement,” Module
Placement Guidelines, page 6-30 and Appendix A—“Module Placement
Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1 for more information.
Note: All modules and ports come up “locked” and the port LEDs remain
“off”. Modules and ports are “unlocked” or enabled as part of equipment
configuration. Refer to Volume 3, Provisioning for more information.
4 The Place Standby GCM and All Other Modules procedure is complete.

TransAccess 100 Mux Initial Configuration
Refer to the following LED indicator tables for each type of module:
■ Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators, page 6-21.
■ Visual Status During and After Start-up, page 6-20.
■ GCM LED Indicators, page 6-22.
■ DS1, DS3, and VT Switch Module Port LED Indicators, page 6-23.
■ OC-N Module Port LED Indicators, page 6-24.
■ GbE and Fast Ethernet Port LED Indicators, page 6-24.
TransAccess The TransAccess 100 STS-1/T1 Mux is an optional piece of equipment that may be
100 Mux Initial installed as part of your Traverse system. The TransAccess 100 Mux has its own Craft
Configuration Terminal interface used for initial configuration. The TransNav Management System is
used for remote management of the TransAccess 100 Mux after initial configuration is
complete. Please refer to TransAccess 100 Mux customer documentation for detailed
information.
The TransAccess 100 Mux is connected to the TransNav system, via an Ethernet hub,
to the backplane DCN Ethernet interface (RJ-45 connector) on the Traverse backplane.
Please refer to Appendix C—“TransAccess 100 Mux Network Diagram,” page 7-23 for
a drawing showing how the TransAccess 100 Mux is connected to the data
communications network (DCN) for management via the TransNav system. The
following IP address information must be set during TransAccess 100 Mux initial
configuration:
■ Local Ethernet IP address.
■ Subnet Mask.
■ Gateway IP address.

PDAP LED Indicators
PDAP LED Refer to table 6-6 for information on how to interpret LED indicators on the Power
Indicators Distribution and Alarm Panel (PDAP).
GMT Fuse GMT Fuse

Block Block
Power Power
Input Critical Minor Input

Power Power
“A” Major “B”
Figure 6-5 PDAP-2S LEDs
TPA Fuses “A” TPA Fuses “B”
Input GMT Input Critical Minor

Power Fuse Power Major
“A” “B”
Figure 6-6 PDAP-4S LEDs
The LEDs in the following table apply to LEDs on the PDAP-2S, and PDAP-4S.
Table 6-6 PDAP
LED RED GREEN AMBER OFF
Critical At least one No critical alarms

Summary critical alarm in N/A N/A for the entire rack.
Alarm the rack.
At least one fuse All fuses are good No power.

GMT Fuse
failure in GMT in GMT Fuse
Block N/A
Fuse Block “A” or Block “A” or “B.”
Power
“B.”
Power from No power.

Input
N/A Battery “A” or N/A
Power
“B” input.
Major At least one major No major alarms

Summary alarm in the rack. N/A N/A for the entire rack.
Alarm

Front Inlet Fan Module and LED Indicators
Table 6-6 PDAP (continued)
LED RED GREEN AMBER OFF
Minor At least one minor No minor alarms

Summary N/A N/A alarm exists in the for the entire rack.
Alarm rack.
TPA Fuse The TPA fuse is

Power The TPA fuse has good.
N/A N/A
(PDAP-4S failed.
only)
Front Inlet Fan The location of the front inlet fan module LEDs are shown in the following figure, refer
Module and to table 6-7 for information on how to interpret LED indicators.
LED Indicators
Fan Failure Power

(red) (green)
Figure 6-7 Front Inlet Fan Module with LEDs
Table 6-7 Front Inlet Fan Module
LED RED GREEN OFF
Power N/A Power on. No power.
■ At least one fan ■ All fans are working.

module, fan tray ■ Communication with
eeprom or thermistor GCM is good.
has failed. Check and ■ All temperature
replace the fan tray indications are good.
and/or module.
■ Lost communication
with GCM. Reseat
Fan
the fan tray. N/A
Failure
■ Over temperature
condition on the
GCM. Check that the
room temperature is
not abnormally high
or replace the front
inlet fan tray air
filter.

Fan Tray Holder and LED Indicators
Fan Tray This topic applies to the original fan tray unit with separate air ramp unit (pre-Release
Holder and 1.4).
LED Indicators The location of the fan tray holder LEDs are shown in the following drawing, refer to
table 6-7 for information on how to interpret LED indicators.
Fan Failure Power
(red) (green)
Figure 6-8 Fan Tray Holder with LEDs
Table 6-8 Fan Tray Holder
LED RED GREEN OFF
Power N/A Power on. No power.
■ At least one fan ■ All fans are working.

module, fan tray ■ Communication with
eeprom or thermistor GCM is good.
has failed. Check and ■ All temperature
replace the fan tray. indications are good.
■ Lost communication
with GCM. Reseat
Fan
the fan tray. N/A
Failure
■ Over temperature
condition on the
GCM. Check that the
room temperature is
not abnormally high
or replace the fan
tray air filter.

Module LED Locations
Module LED The location of common and specific module LED locations is shown in the following
Locations graphic. Refer to the tables that follow for module LED indicator information.
PWR
(Power) Alarms:
CRITICAL/MAJOR
ACTV/ MINOR
STNBY ACO ON
(Active/Standby) ACO
Optical
Port
Timing:
DS1, DS3, OC-N LOCKED/
and GbE Port UNLOCKED
Indicators FREE RUN/
HOLDOVER
ETHERNET LINK
OSS and Craft
10/100BaseT
Ethernet Interface
(RJ-45)
RS-232 Interface
(DB-9)
DS1 DS3 OC-N VT GbE EGCM

Switch
Figure 6-9 Module LED Locations

Visual Status During and After Start-up
Visual Status The GCM power LED indicates the status of start-up and initialization. Please refer to
During and Figure 6-9 Module LED Locations, page 6-19 for LED locations on module
After Start-up faceplates, and the tables beginning on page 6-21 for module LED definitions. The
GCM power LED will go through the following sequence:
Flashing red. Power On Self Test (POST) is started7.
Solid green. Initialization complete and successful.
Table 6-9 Power and Active/Standby—GCM Modules
RED Amber GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Initializing; Hardware Passed No power.

POST is failure initialization
Power started. detected; N/A N/A N/A and
replace the operational.
module.
Standby Module type Standby Active and Initializing;

mode; syn- does not mode; syn- operational. POST is
chronization match the chronization started.
Active/ with the active provisioned with the active
N/A N/A
Standby card is not module type; card is
complete. or the module complete.
is placed in an
invalid slot1.
1
Please refer to Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1 for valid module placement guidelines.
Important: The steady on “green” Active/Standby LED indicates the

active GCM module. Initial configuration is done through the active GCM
via the Command Line Interface (CLI).
7
The POST takes approximately one minute to run, and it invokes the LED activity for initialization.

Power and Active/Standby LED Indicators
Power and The LEDs in the following tables apply to all modules.
Active/Standby
LED Indicators
Table 6-10 Power and Active/Standby—All Modules
RED Amber GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Initialization Hardware Initialization is No power.

and failure complete and
diagnosis is detected; the module is
Power N/A N/A N/A
underway, replace the operational.
but not module.
complete.
The module is The module is The module is The Active The module
unlocked and in unlocked. The unlocked and in module is is locked; or
Standby mode1. module type Standby mode. unlocked, and initialization
Synchronization does not match Synchronization operational. is not
Active/
N/A N/A with the Active the provisioned with the Active complete.
Standby
module is not module type; or module is
complete. the module is complete.
placed in an
invalid slot2.
1
Does not apply to GbE or OC-N modules.
2
Please refer to Appendix A—“Module Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1 for valid module placement guidelines.

GCM LED Indicators
GCM LED The LEDs in the following tables apply to GCM modules only. If you have placed
Indicators GCMs with integrated (OC-12/STM-4 or OC-48/STM-16) optics also refer to
Table 1-44 Optical Module/Port Status, page 1-124.
Table 6-11 Alarm
RED AMBER
LED OFF
Steady On Steady On
One or more critical or major No critical or major alarms.

Critical/ alarms are active. Indicates a
N/A
Major service-affecting event(s) and
requires immediate action.
One or more minor alarms are No minor alarms.

active. Indicates a
Minor N/A non-service-affecting event(s).
Take action to prevent a more
serious problem.
Alarm The audible alarm is cut off The audible alarm is not cut off
Cutoff N/A (silenced). (not silenced).
(ACO)
Table 6-12 Timing Subsystem
RED GREEN AMBER

LED OFF
Steady On Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Selected Lost-phase Locked to a Initialization is

Locked/ timing input mode. LED timing input not complete or
N/A N/A
Unlocked reference is flashes at 500ms reference1. the GCM is in
lost. on/off rate. free-run mode.
Tracking a Free-run mode2. Transitioning Hold-over Initialization is

timing reference out of hold-over mode3. not complete or
signal, but not mode, but not the GCM is
Free-run/ completely out Locked. LED locked to a
N/A
Hold-over of free-run flashes at 500ms timing input
mode. LED on/off rate. reference1.
flashes at 500ms
on/off rate.
1
Timing input references are: T1, Composite Clock, or OC-N line timing reference.
2
A valid timing input reference is not available and the GCM is unable to acquire an estimate for hold-over, or the GCM is configured
for free-run mode.
3
The external timing reference is degraded or lost and no other input references are available for system synchronization. The GCM
was locked to its selected timing input reference and established a valid frequency estimate before going into hold-over mode.

DS1, DS3, and VT Switch Module Port LED Indicators
Table 6-13 Ethernet Link (OSS and Craft 10/100BaseT)
RED GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Running Port is Transmitting Operational, Port is locked.

diagnostics or unlocked, but or receiving the link is
Ethernet
in loopback there is no link frames. active.
Port
mode. integrity/
signal.
DS1, DS3, and The LEDs in the following table apply to electrical (DS1, DS3, and VT Switch) mod-
VT Switch ules only.
Module Port
LED Indicators
Table 6-14 Electrical Module/Port Status
RED GREEN OFF
LED Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Running Unlocked and a Unlocked and Module

diagnostics or in port failure is receiving a valid initialization is not
loopback mode. detected (LOS, signal. complete, the
Ports N/A
LOF/OOF, AIS, module is in
RFI). Standby mode, or
the port is locked.

OC-N Module Port LED Indicators
OC-N Module The LEDs in the following table apply to optical modules (OC-N/STM-N) and to the
Port LED optical ports (OC-12/STM-4 or OC-48/STM-16) on the GCM with integrated optics
Indicators modules.
Table 6-15 Optical Module/Port Status
RED GREEN OFF
LED Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Running Unlocked and a Unlocked and Unlocked and Module

diagnostics or in port failure is receiving a valid receiving a valid initialization is not
loopback mode. detected (LOS, signal; in Standby signal. complete or the
Ports
LOF/OOF, AIS, mode for a 1+1 port is locked.
RFI). facility protection
group.
GbE and Fast The LEDs in the following table apply to the GbE LX-VC, GbE LX-VC plus 100Base
Ethernet Port FX-VC Combo, GbE LX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo, GbE SX-VC plus
LED Indicators 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo, and the 10/100BaseTX-VC modules.
Table 6-16 GbE and Fast Ethernet Port
RED GREEN OFF

LED
Flashing Steady On Flashing Steady On
Running Unlocked no Unlocked and Unlocked and Module

diagnostics or link integrity/ transmitting operational. initialization
Ethernet in loopback signal or receiving The Ethernet is not
Port mode. detected. frames. link is active. complete or
the port is
locked.

Chapter 2
Module Placement
Introduction The Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelves support:

■ General Control Modules (GCMs).
■ VT Switch 2688 modules.
■ Service Interface Modules.
Service interface modules support multiple services (DS1, DS3, SONET, and Ethernet)
and bandwidths (DS1, DS3/EC-1 Clear Channel, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48 and OC-192).
The following tables list the GCMs, VT Switch 2688 module and service interface
modules; and the maximum number of slots/ports in Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000
shelf configurations (for unprotected and protected schemes).
Table 6-17 General Control Modules
Traverse 1600 Max. Traverse 2000 Max.

Modules and Ports Modules and Ports
per Shelf per Shelf
Module Description
Max. Max. Max. Max.
Modules Ports Modules Ports
GCM General Control Module 2 n/a 2 n/a

1 2
Enhanced GCM Enhanced General Control 2 n/a 2 n/a
Module
GCM OC-12/STM-4 IR1 1P1 2 General Control Module 2 2 2 2

with integrated
OC-12/STM-4 optics,
Intermediate Reach, 1310
nm IR-1
GCM OC-12/STM-4 LR2 1P1 2 General Control Module 2 2 2 2

with integrated
OC-12/STM-4 optics, Long
Reach, 1550 nm LR-2

Introduction
Table 6-17 General Control Modules (continued)
Traverse 1600 Max. Traverse 2000 Max.

Modules and Ports Modules and Ports
per Shelf per Shelf
Module Description
Max. Max. Max. Max.
Modules Ports Modules Ports
GCM OC-48/STM-16 IR1 1P General Control Module 2 2 2 2

with integrated
OC-48/STM-16 optics,
Intermediate Reach, 1310
nm IR-1
GCM OC-48/STM-16 LR2 1P General Control Module 2 2 2 2

with integrated
OC-48/STM-16 optics,
Long Reach, 1550 nm LR-2
1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed
with a Enhanced GCM for GCM redundancy.
2
The Enhanced GCM and GCMs with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) support environmental alarms.
Note: GCMs are placed in Traverse 1600 slots GCMA (slot 15) and GCMB (slot 16).
GCMs are placed in Traverse 2000 slots GCMA (slot 19) and GCMB (slot 20).
Table 6-18 VT Switch 2688 Module
Max. Modules
Module Description
per Shelf
VT Switch 2688 VT 1.5 Switch Module; 2688 VT capacity See Note.
Note: The VT switching capacity should match the input/output capacity of the
Traverse shelf. The maximum number of VT Switch 2688 modules is therefore
dependent on the types and capacity of the I/O modules. Place VT Switch 2688
modules in any Traverse slots except GCMA and GCMB.

Chapter 2 Module Placement
Introduction
Table 6-19 Service Interface Modules
Traverse 1600 Max. Modules Traverse 2000 Max. Modules

and Ports per Shelf and Ports per Shelf
Service Interface
Description
Module
Max. Max.
Max. Ports Max. Ports
Modules Modules
336 (unprotected) 448 (unprotected)
168 (1:1 equipment 224 (1:1 equipment

28-port DS1 Extended
DS1-XT 28P 12 protection) 16 protection)
Temperature Interface Module
protection) protection)

12-port DS3/E3/EC-1 Clear
DS3/EC-1 CC 12P 12 protection) 16 protection)
Channel Interface Module

24-port DS3/E3/EC-1 Clear
DS3/EC-1 CC 24P 12 protection) 16 protection)
Channel Interface Module

12-port DS3/EC-1 Transmux
DS3/EC-1 TMUX 12P 12 protection) 16 protection)
Interface Module
2-port 1000Base-LX Gigabit 28 1000Base ports 36 1000Base ports

GbE LX-VC 2P plus Ethernet with VC plus 8-port (unprotected) (unprotected)
100BaseFX-VC 8P 100BaseFX Fast Ethernet 14 18
Combo Interface Module with VC (fiber 112 100Base ports 144 100Base ports
optic interface) (unprotected) (unprotected)
2-port 1000Base-LX Gigabit 24 1000Base ports 32 1000Base ports

GbE LX-VC 2P plus Ethernet with VC plus 16-port (unprotected) (unprotected)
10/100BaseTX-VC 16P 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet 12 16
Combo Interface Module with VC 192 10/100Base 256 10/100Base
(twisted pair/cooper interface) ports (unprotected) ports (unprotected)
2-port 1000Base-SX Gigabit 24 1000Base ports 32 1000Base ports

GbE SX-VC 2P plus Ethernet with VC plus 16-port (unprotected) (unprotected)
10/100BaseTX-VC 16P 10/100BaseTX Fast Ethernet 12 16
Combo Interface Module with VC 192 10/100Base 256 10/100Base
(twisted pair/cooper interface) ports (unprotected) ports (unprotected)

Introduction
Table 6-19 Service Interface Modules (continued)

Service Interface
Description
Module
Max. Max.
Modules Modules
8-port OC-3/STM-1 Interface 112 (unprotected) 144 (unprotected)

OC-3/STM-1 IR1 8P Module–Intermediate Reach, 14 56 (1+1 facility 18 72 (1+1 facility
1310 nm IR-1 protection) protection)

OC-12/STM-4 IR1 4P Module–Intermediate Reach, 14 28 (1+1 facility 18 36 (1+1 facility
1310 nm IR-1 protection) protection)

OC-12/STM-4 LR2 4P Module–Long Reach, 1550 nm 14 28 (1+1 facility 18 36 (1+1 facility
LR-2 protection) protection)
OC-48/STM-16 SR 1P 1-port OC-48/STM-16 Interface

Module–Short Reach, 1266 to
1360 nm SR
OC-48/STM-16 IR1 1P 1-port OC-48/STM-16 Interface

Module–Intermediate Reach,
1260 to 1360 nm IR-1
OC-48/STM-16 LR1 1P 1-port OC-48/STM-16 Interface

Module–Long Reach, 1310 nm
LR-1
OC-48/STM-16 LR2 1P 1-port OC-48/STM-16 Interface 18
Module–Long Reach, 1550 nm 14 7 (1+1 facility 9 (1+1 facility
LR-2 protection) protection)
OC-48/STM-16 VR ITU 1-port OC-48/STM-16 Interface

1P Module-Very Long Reach
Channel N and N+1 (≥32dB, from 1534.25 to
(N=odd frequencies 191.9 1558.98 nm, 100 GHz spacing)
to 195.9) THz at 100 GHz VR ITU Channel
spacing)

Introduction
Table 6-19 Service Interface Modules (continued)

Service Interface
Description
Module
Max. Max.
Modules Modules
OC-192/STM-64 SR1 1P Dual-slot, 1-port

OC-192/STM-64 Interface
Module, Short Reach 1310 nm
SR-1
OC-192/STM-64 SR2 1P Dual-slot, 1-port

Module, Short Reach 1550 nm
SR-2 7 (unprotected) 9 (unprotected)
7 3 (1+1 facility 9 4 (1+1 facility
OC-192/STM-64 IR2 1P Dual-slot, 1-port protection) protection)
Module, Intermediate Reach
1550 nm IR-2
OC-192/STM-64 ELR IP Dual-slot, 1-port

Module, Long Reach 1550 nm
ELR
Note: DS3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1 TMUX, 10/100BaseTX-VC, GbE LX-VC plus

10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and the GbE SX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo
modules are placed in Traverse 1600 slots 1–12 and Traverse 2000 slots 1–16.

Module Placement Guidelines
Module Copper/coax cabling at the main backplane and at the fiber optic backplane must
Placement support module placement. Traverse 1600 shelf slots are numbered 1 to 14, GCMA
Guidelines (slot 15) and GCMB (slot 16), left to right when viewed from the front. Traverse 2000
shelf slots are numbered 1 to 18, GCMA (slot 19) and GCMB (slot 20), left to right
when viewed from the front. The following table provides restrictions regarding
placement of modules. Please refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module
Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1 for additional module placement
information.
Table 6-20 Module Placement Guidelines
Traverse Traverse
Module Type 1600 2000 Comments
Slot #s Slot #s
GCM, GCMA and GCMA and Redundant GCMs are recommended for equipment protection.
Enhanced GCM (EGCM), GCMB GCMB However, if only one GCM is used it can be placed in either slot
GCM OC-12/STM-4, (slots 15 and (slots 19 and GCMA or GCMB.
GCM OC-48/STM-16 16) 20)
Redundant GCMs can be different types. See Table 6-21
Redundancy Rules for GCM Types below.
DS1, 1–12 1–16 In a 1:1 equipment protection scheme1, the module to the left
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC (12-port), protects the right-adjacent working module. In an unprotected
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC (24-port), scheme, place modules in any valid slot; the 2-slot DS3/E3
DS3/EC-1 TMUX electrical connector module (ECM) provides access to only the
E1 right-most DS3/E3/EC-1 module so place an optic module in the
left-most slot.
In a 1:2 equipment protection scheme, the center module protects

the left- and right-adjacent working modules. In an unprotected
scheme, place modules in any valid slot; the 3-slot DS3/E3 ECM
provides access to only the left- and right-most DS3/E3/EC-1
modules so place an optic module in the center slot.
10/100BaseTX, 1–12 1–16 Use the following module placement options when placing any
GbE LX plus 10/100BaseTX-inclusive modules in a Traverse shelf with DS1,
10/100BaseTX Combo, DS3/E3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1 TMUX, or E1 modules:
GbE SX plus ■ Place an OC-N/STM-N module or place a 1-slot wide blank
10/100BaseTX Combo faceplate between the 10/100BaseTX and an electrical interface
module, if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the
right of the electrical interface module.
or
■ Place 10/100BaseTX-inclusive modules directly to the left of
DS1, DS3/EC-1/EC-1 CC, or DS3/EC-1 TMUX or E1 modules.
An OC-N/STM-N module or 1-slot wide blank faceplate is not
required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive modules are placed to
the left of electrical interface modules.

Table 6-20 Module Placement Guidelines (continued)
Traverse Traverse
Module Type 1600 2000 Comments
Slot #s Slot #s
GbE LX, 1–14 1–18 None.

GbE LX plus 100BaseFX
Combo,
OC-3/STM-1,
OC-12/STM-4,
OC-48/STM-16,
OC-192/STM-64 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, The OC-192/STM-64 modules require two slots for placement.
7/8, 9/10, 7/8, 9/10, The left side of the OC-192/STM-64 module is placed in an odd
11/12, and 11/12, 13/14, numbered slot.
13/14 15/16, and
17/18
VT Switch (2688) 1–14 1–18 In a 1:1 equipment protection scheme, the working and protection
VT Switch 2688 modules must be placed adjacently in the shelf.
1
Refer to pre-Release 1.3 Traverse system documentation for placement restrictions with respect to the superseded Traverse backplane
design supporting only 1:1 protection schemes.
Important: Place an OC-N or 1-slot wide blank faceplate between any

10/100BaseTX-inclusive module and an electrical module (DS1,
DS3/E3/EC-1 CC, or DS3/EC-1 TMUX module), if the
10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the right of an electrical
interface module. A blank faceplate or OC-N module is not required if the
10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the left of an electrical
module.
Important: 1-slot wide blank faceplates must be placed in any empty

slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
The following module placement scheme is recommended but not required:

■ Place DS1, DS3/E3/EC-1 CC, DS3/EC-1 TMUX, and 10/100BaseTX (see
important note above for 10/100BaseTX placement) modules from the left-most
slots (beginning with slots 1 and 2) and work towards the center of the shelf as
required up to Traverse 1600 slot 12, or Traverse 2000 slot 16.
■ Place VT Switch 2688 modules next to the GCM modules, place additional
modules toward the center of the shelf as required.
■ Place OC-N and GbE modules (optical modules) beginning in the right-most
available slot (starting at Traverse 1600 slot 14 or Traverse 2000 slot 18), place
additional modules towards the center of the shelf as required.

The following table shows the redundancy rules for all GCM types:
Table 6-21 Redundancy Rules for GCM Types
Active GCM Standby GCM
GCM GCM
GCM EGCM1
EGCM1 GCM
EGCM EGCM
GCM OC-N/STM-N2 GCM OC-N/STM-N2
1
EGCM environmental alarm function should not be used in this redundancy combination.
2
Traverse supports in-service upgrade from a node running R1.2 (or greater) software with two regular
GCM modules to a node running R1.4 software with two GCM OC-N/STM-N modules.

Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Module Layout
Example The following graphic provides an example of module placement for a Traverse 1600
Traverse 1600 shelf carrying multiple services and bandwidths. Included in this example are:
Shelf Module (6) DS3/EC-1, (2) OC-3/STM-1, (2) OC-12/STM-4, (2) OC-48/STM-16, (1)
Layout OC-192/STM-64, and (2) GCM modules.
Slot #s 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
DS3/EC-1 OC-3 OC-12 OC-48 OC-192 GCMA and B
Figure 6-10 Example Traverse 1600 Shelf Module Layout

Required
Equipment and Important: Place modules in the correct sequence after the Traverse
Tools shelf is powered up. Refer to Module Placement and Initial
Configuration Sequence, page 6-10 for detailed procedures.
The following equipment and tools are required to place modules in a Traverse shelf:
■ MPX cleaning kit1.
■ 1 or 2 General Control Modules.
■ The number and combination of modules is based on your network requirements
and physical cabling at the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 main and fiber optic
backplanes. Please refer to Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module
Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1 for additional information.
■ 1-slot wide blank faceplates are required in any empty slots to ensure EMI
protection and proper cooling.
Clean Fiber It is critical that optical MPX connectors are clean to ensure proper operation. Turin
Optic MPX recommends that you visually inspect the MPX connectors on both the fiber optic
Connectors cables and optical modules using fiber optic magnification equipment. Turin also
recommends that you clean the MPX connectors using the following procedure.
Fiber optic cable MPX connectors must be cleaned just before inserting optical
modules to remove any visible dust or dirt. If the fiber optic backplane was pre-cabled,
each MPX connector must be removed from the backplane, cleaned and replaced into
the backplane.
Optical module MPX connectors must be cleaned just before inserting the module into
the Traverse shelf to remove any visible dust or dirt. MPX connectors on the fiber optic
cable and module are protected from dirt and dust once they are both connected at the
fiber optic backplane.
Traverse modules ship with an AMP Lightray™ MPX Cleaning Kit. For detailed
instructions on cleaning connectors, see the accompanying instruction sheet2.

1
Required to clean fiber optic cable MPX connectors and optical module MPX connectors.
2
Additional copies of the instruction sheet can be printed from Tyco’s AMP Web site www.amp.com. The
instruction sheet part number is 1457019-2.

Clean Fiber Optic MPX Connectors


or connector, as it may cause eye damage.

to prevent electrostatic damage.
Important: Do not touch the end of the MPX connectors.
Step Procedure
1 Was the fiber optic cable pre-cabled?

■ If yes, continue to Step 2.
2 Remove the fiber optic cable MPX connector(s) from the fiber optic
backplane.
3 Clean the MPX connector on the fiber optic cable using the MPX cleaning
kit and by following the included instructions. The cleaning kit includes:
■ Single bulkhead for cleaning fiber optic cable MPX connectors.

Step Procedure
4 Align the “white reference marker” on the MPX connector with the white
stripe on the left side of the fiber optic backplane housing.
White Stripe
Reference Markers
Housing B
Housing A
Note: 4-port OC-12/STM-4, and 1-port OC-48/STM-16 and OC-192/

STM-64 modules require one fiber optic cable placed in housing A.
Note: 8-port OC-3/STM-1 and GbE LX-VC modules require “transmit”
and “receive” fiber optic cables placed in housing A (transmit) and B
(receive).
5 Gently push the MPX connector back into the correct fiber optic backplane
housing.
6 Repeat Steps 2 through 6 for each MPX connector.

Step Procedure
7 Remove the dust cap from the MPX connector(s) on the optical module.
Dust Cap on MPX
Connector
Figure 6-12 MPX Connector on Optical Module
8 Clean the MPX connector(s) on the optical module using the MPX
cleaning kit and by following the included instructions. The cleaning kit
includes:
■ Duplex bulkhead for cleaning the duplex MPX connectors on the
optical module.
9 Continue to the next procedure, Insert a Module.

Insert Module
Insert Module Follow these steps to insert modules once you have established their proper position in
the Traverse shelf based on your engineering work order and the physical cabling at the
main and fiber optic backplanes.

to prevent any electrostatic damage.
Important: A properly grounded ESD wrist strap must be worn at all

Follow all warnings and instructions included in module packaging to
prevent any electrostatic damage.
Important: Each slot in the Traverse shelf has guides at the top and
bottom to properly align the module into position for contact with the
main and mesh backplanes. Use these guides to make sure the module is
vertical and properly aligned. This is easier to do if you are eye level with
the shelf.
Important: Each module has two guide pins on the back edge. These
guide pins go through the back bar of the shelf to accurately align the
modules with the mesh backplane. The GCM guide pins are sized
differently from the guide pins on other modules. This “keying” feature
ensures the GCM is placed only in slots GCMA or GCMB and that other
modules are not placed in these slots.

Insert Module
Follow these steps to insert a module.
Step Procedure
1 Is this an optical module with MPX connectors?

■ If yes, complete the Clean MPX Connectors procedure before
proceeding.
2 Flip the module locking tabs up. Hold the module with the tabs parallel to
the top and bottom of the module.
Guide Pins
Locking Tabs in Open

Position
Figure 6-13 Module Locking Tabs in the Unlocked Position

Insert Module
Step Procedure
3 Important: Each slot in the Traverse shelf has guides at the top and
bottom to properly align the module into position for contact with the main
and mesh backplanes. Use these guides to make sure the module is vertical
and properly aligned. This is easier to do if you are eye level with the shelf.
Insert the module in the Traverse shelf using the guides at the top and
bottom of the card cage for proper alignment. Make sure the module is
vertical, from top to bottom and that the module stays in the guides from
the front to the back of the shelf.
Card Cage Guides for

Module Alignment
Figure 6-14 Traverse Shelf with Guides
4 Important: Modules should insert easily into the Traverse shelf, do not
5 Push the center of the module face until the locking tabs start to close and
the locking tabs start to roll around the lip of the Traverse shelf. The
optical modules make an audible “click” to indicate that it is making
contact with the fiber optic backplane connectors.

Insert Module
Step Procedure
6 Push the locking tabs down. The tabs must close around the shelf top and
bottom to lock the module in place.
Locking Tabs in
Closed Position
Figure 6-15 Module Tabs in the Locked Position
7 Press the tabs into their locked position to secure the module. The module
is locked into position when the top and bottom tabs are pressed down
completely.
8 The Insert a Module procedure is complete.

Insert Module

S ECTION 7 A PPENDICES
SECTION 7
Contents
Appendix A
Module Placement Planning and Guidelines
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Traverse 1600 Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Traverse 2000 Module Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Appendix B
Installation and Configuration Checklists
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Hardware Installation Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Network Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible and Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . 7-11
Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Power Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Appendix C
TransAccess 100 Mux Network Diagram
TransAccess 100 Mux Network Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
Appendix D
GCM Ethernet and RS-232 Pinouts
GCM Ethernet and RS-232 Interface Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
List of Figures
Figure 7-1 TransAccess 100 Muxes Connected to an Ethernet Network. . . . 7-23
List of Tables
Table 7-1 Traverse 1600 Module Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Table 7-2 Traverse 2000 Module Placement Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Table 7-3 Hardware Installation Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Table 7-4 Network Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Table 7-5 Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible, Environmental and
Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Table 7-6 Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Table 7-7 Power Cabling Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Table 7-8 Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Table 7-9 GCM Ethernet (RJ-45) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Volume 2 Section 7 Appendices
Table 7-10 GCM RS-232 (DB-9) Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26

SECTION 7APPENDICES
Appendix A
Module Placement Planning and Guidelines
Introduction It is important to plan for module placement during installation, cabling and start-up
activities for the Traverse system. The following tables provide module placement
guidelines for both the Traverse 1600 and Traverse 2000 shelves, including:
■ Valid slot placement for GCM, optical, electrical, and VT Switch modules.
■ Equipment 1:1 and 1:2 protection, working and protection module placement.
■ Unprotected module placement.
This appendix contains information on the following topics:
■ Traverse 1600 Module Placement, page 7-2.
■ Traverse 2000 Module Placement, page 7-4.

Traverse 1600 The following table provides module placement guidelines for the Traverse 1600 shelf.
Page 7-2
Traverse 1600 Module Placement

Volume 2, Section 7: Appendices
Module Legend: Grey Fill=valid slot for module, No Fill=invalid slot for module, Standby or Active (S/A), Protecting (P), Working
Placement (W), Open (O).
Table 7-1 Traverse 1600 Module Placement Guidelines

Traverse 1600 Slot Numbers
Module Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
GCM S/A S/A
GCM
Enhanced GCM1
GCM OC-12/STM-41
GCM OC-48/STM-161
Optical (Note: Optical modules are protected at the port level, there are no slot or module placement restrictions for optical working/protection.)
OC-3/STM-1, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
OC-12/STM-4,
Turin Networks
OC-48/STM-16
GbE LX-VC, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
GbE LX-VC plus
100BaseFX-VC Combo
OC-192/STM-64 Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14
Electrical with 1:1 Equipment Protection and 2-Slot Electrical Connection Module
DS1, P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
DS3/EC-1 CC,
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
DS3/EC-1 CC, O P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P/O W/P W
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
Electrical with 1:2 Equipment Protection
DS1, W W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W
DS3/EC-1 CC,
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
Release 1.4
Release 1.4

Module Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Electrical without Equipment Protection (Note: the GbE LX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC and GbE SX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo modules have 2 optical ports and 16
electrical ports. The module placement restriction is due to the electrical ports.)
10/100BaseTX-VC, W W W W W W W W W W W W
DS1,
GbE LX-VC plus
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo,
GbE SX-VC plus
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo
Electrical without Equipment Protection and 2-slot Electrical Connector Module (Note: the DS3/EC-1 module placement restriction is due to the electrical connector module.)
DS3/EC-1 CC, O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
Electrical without Equipment Protection and 3-slot Electrical Connector Module (Note: the DS3/EC-1 module placement restriction is due to the electrical connector module.)
Turin Networks
DS3/EC-1 CC, W W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W/O W
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
VT Switch with 1:1 Equipment Protection
VT Switch W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P W/P
Appendix A Module Placement Planning and Guidelines

VT Switch without Equipment Protection
VT Switch W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed with a Enhanced GCM for GCM redundancy.
Important: Place an OC-N or 1-slot wide blank faceplate between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module and an electrical module
(DS1, DS3/EC-1 CC, or DS3/EC-1 TMUX), if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the right of an electrical interface

module. A blank faceplate or OC-N module is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the left of an electrical
module.
Important: Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in empty slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
Page 7-3
Traverse 2000 The following table provides module placement guidelines for the Traverse 2000 shelf.
Page 7-4

Module Legend: Grey Fill=valid slot for module, No Fill=invalid slot for module, Standby or Active (S/A), Protecting (P), Working
Placement (W), Open (O).

Module Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GCM S/A S/A
GCM
Enhanced GCM1
GCM OC-12/STM-41
GCM OC-48/STM-161
Optical (Note: Optical modules are protected at the port level, there are no slot or module placement restrictions for optical working/protection.)
OC-3/STM-1, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
OC-12/STM-4,
OC-48/STM-16
Turin Networks
GbE LX-VC, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
GbE LX-VC plus
100BaseFX-VC Combo
OC-192/STM-64 Slots 1/2 Slots 3/4 Slots 5/6 Slots 7/8 Slots 9/10 Slots 11/12 Slots 13/14 Slots 15/16 Slots 17/18
DS1, P W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
DS3/EC-1 CC, P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
DS3/EC-1 CC, O P/O W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
DS3/EC-1 TMUX P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P/O P
Electrical with 1:2 Equipment Protection
DS1, W W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
DS3/EC-1 CC, P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
DS3/EC-1 TMUX
Release 1.4
Release 1.4

Module Type
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Electrical without Protection (Note: the GbE LX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo and GbE LX-VC plus 10/100BaseTX-VC Combo modules have 2 optical ports and 16 electrical
ports. The module placement restriction is due to the electrical ports.)
10/100BaseTX-VC, W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
DS1,
GbE LX-VC plus
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo,
GbE SX-VC plus
10/100BaseTX-VC Combo
Electrical without Protection and 2-slot Electrical Connector Module (Note: the DS3/EC-1 module placement restriction is due to the electrical connector module.)
DS3/EC-1 CC, O W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
DS3/EC-1 TMUX O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
Electrical without Protection and 3-slot Electrical Connector Module (Note: the DS3/EC-1 module placement restriction is due to the electrical connector module.)
DS3/EC-1 CC, W W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W
Turin Networks
DS3/EC-1 TMUX O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
VT Switch with 1:1 Equipment Protection
VT Switch with 1:1 W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/ W/
Equipment Protection P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
Appendix A Module Placement Planning and Guidelines

VT Switch without Equipment Protection
VT Switch without Equipment W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
Protection
1
Redundant GCMs can be different types; e.g., a GCM with integrated optics (OC-12/STM-4 and OC-48/STM-16) placed with a Enhanced GCM for GCM redundancy.
Important: Place an OC-N or 1-slot wide blank faceplate between any 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module and an electrical module

(DS1, DS3/EC-1 CC, or DS3/EC-1 TMUX), if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the right of an electrical interface
module. A blank faceplate or OC-N module is not required if the 10/100BaseTX-inclusive module is placed to the left of an electrical
module.
Important: Place 1-slot wide blank faceplates in empty slots to ensure EMI protection and proper cooling.
Page 7-5

SECTION 7APPENDICES
Appendix B
Installation and Configuration Checklists
Introduction This chapter includes checklists to provide the basic steps necessary to complete
Traverse system hardware installation, cabling and initial configuration steps. Each
step references the related detail-level procedure for additional information.
■ Hardware Installation Checklist, page 7-8.
■ Network Cabling Checklist, page 7-9.
■ Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible and Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist,
page 7-11.
■ Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist, page 7-14.
■ Power Cabling Checklist, page 7-16.
■ Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist, page 7-19.

Hardware Installation Checklist
Hardware Basic precautions for hardware installation are provided in Section 1—Basic
Installation Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions.”
Checklist All hardware installation detail-level procedure references are to Section 2—Hardware
Installation. Required equipment and tools are also provided as part of each chapter.
Table 7-3 Hardware Installation Checklist
Step Description and Procedure Reference ✔

1 Install the PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S), Traverse shelf, front
inlet fan tray holder with integrated air ramp in the central office
bay and rack indicated on your engineering work order using
thread-forming screws. Thread-forming screws are required to
ground Traverse hardware to a properly grounded telco rack.
Note: Installation of Traverse 1600 hardware in a 23-inch rack
requires standard conductive plated rack adapters.
PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S). Install the PDAP at the top of
the Traverse equipment rack. Detail-level installation procedures
are located in Chapter 1—“Power Distribution and Alarm Panel”:
■ PDAP 19-Inch Rack Installation, page 2-5.
■ PDAP to 23-inch Rack Adaptation Installation, page 2-6.
2 Traverse Shelf. Install the first Traverse shelf below the PDAP
with a 3/8-inch space to allow for proper air flow.
Detail-level installation procedures are located in Chapter
2—“Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air
Ramp”:
■ Standard Traverse Shelf Rack Installation, page 2-10.
■ Traverse 1600 Shelf to 23-inch Rack Adaptation
Installation, page 2-13.
3 Fan Tray Holder. A front inlet fan tray holder with integrated air
ramp is required for each Traverse shelf to ensure proper cooling.
Connect the front inlet fan tray holder power cable to the J1 FAN
TRAY INTERFACE connector on the Traverse main backplane.
Install the front inlet fan tray holder directly below the Traverse
shelf in the rack.
2—“Traverse Shelf, Front Inlet Fan Tray with Integrated Air
Ramp”:
■ Standard Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder Rack Installation,
page 2-12.
■ Traverse 1600 Front Inlet Fan Tray Holder to 23-inch
Rack Adaptation Installation, page 2-15.

Appendix B Installation and Configuration Checklists
Network Cabling Checklist
Table 7-3 Hardware Installation Checklist (continued)

4 Fan Tray Module. Install the front inlet fan tray module into the
front inlet fan tray holder. Place the foam air filter in the gap
between the front inlet fan module and the top of the front inlet
fan tray holder.
3—“Front Inlet Fan Module and Air Filter Installation”:
■ Front Inlet Fan Module Installation, page 2-18.
■ Front Inlet Fan Tray Air Filter Installation, page 2-19.
5 All Hardware Installation Checklist steps are complete.
Network Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection, electrical and fiber optic
Cabling cabling are provided in Volume 2, Installation and Configuration, Section 1—Basic
Checklist Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions.” Basic procedures for cable
routing are provided in Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
3—“Cable Routing.”
All network cabling detail-level procedure references are to Volume 2, Installation and
Configuration, Section 3—Network Interface Cabling. Required equipment and tools
are also provided as part of each cabling chapter.

making connections at the Traverse main backplane or fiber optic
backplane. Plug the ESD wrist strap into the ESD jack provided on the air
ramp or other confirmed source of earth ground.
WARNING! Follow all directions and warning labels when working

with optical fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with
optical fibers. Never look directly into the end of a terminated or
unterminated fiber or connector as it may cause eye damage.

Network Cabling Checklist
Table 7-4 Network Cabling Checklist

1 Plug-in Electrical Connector Modules (ECM). Plug-in
ECM(s) into the main backplane as required for DS1, DS3 and/or
10/100BaseTX cabling.
Detail-level cabling procedures are located in:
■ Chapter 2—“DS1 Cabling,” Plug-in DS1/E1 Electrical
Connector Module, page 3-12.
■ Chapter 3—“DS3 Cabling,” Plug-in DS3/E3 Electrical
■ Chapter 4—“10/100BaseTX Cabling,” Plug-in 10/100BaseT
Electrical Connector Module, page 3-41.
2 Complete DS1, DS3 and/or 10/100BaseT Cabling.
Complete network cabling based on the type of ECM installed.
Detail-level cabling procedures are located in
■ Chapter 2—“DS1 Cabling,” , page 3-5.
■ Chapter 3—“DS3 Cabling,” DS3 Cabling at the Electrical
■ Chapter 4—“10/100BaseTX Cabling,” 10/100BaseTX
Cabling at the Electrical Connector Module, page 3-42.
3 Connect Fiber Optic Cables. Connect fiber optic cables from
the central office optical distribution frame (ODF) or fiber optic
patch panel to the Traverse fiber optic backplane.
The detail-level fiber optic cabling procedure is located in Chapter
5—“Fiber Optic Cabling,” Fiber Optic Cabling, page 3-60.
For information on acceptable minimum/maximum output power
and receiver levels please refer to Volume 4, Maintenance and
Testing, Section 3—Troubleshooting, Chapter 3—“Transmit and
Receive Signal Levels,” Optical Power Specifications,
page 3-17.
4 All Network Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible and Fail-safe Alarm Cabling Checklist
Power, Fuse, Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection are provided in Volume 2,
Visual, Audible Installation and Configuration, Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
and Fail-safe 1—“Precautions.” Basic procedures for cable routing are provided in Section 1—Basic
Alarm Cabling Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 3—“Cable Routing.”
Checklist All alarm cabling detail-level procedure references are to Volume 2, Installation and
Configuration, Section 4—Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling.
Required equipment and tools are also provided as part of each cabling chapter.

making connections at the PDAP-2S, PDAP-4S and Traverse main
.
Table 7-5 Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible, Environmental and Fail-safe Alarm
Cabling Checklist

1 Connect PDAP (PDAP-4S only) Power Alarm Wires.
Connect power alarm wires at the back of the PDAP-4S and to a
central office power alarm panel as required.
The detail-level alarm cabling procedure is located in Chapter
1—“Traverse System Alarm Interface,” PDAP-4S Power Alarm
Connections, page 4-14.
2 Connect PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S) Fuse Alarm
Wires. Connect fuse A and B alarm wires at the back of the
PDAP and to a central office fuse alarm panel as required.
1—“Traverse System Alarm Interface”:
■ Chapter 1—“Traverse System Alarm Interface,” PDAP-2S
Fuse Alarm Connections, page 4-12.
Fuse Alarm Connections, page 4-15.
3 Connect PDAP (PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S) Visual Alarm
Input Wires. Connect visual alarm input wires at the back of the
PDAP as required.
Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 4-13
Visual Alarm Input Connections, page 4-16.

Cabling Checklist (continued)

4 Connect Visual Alarm Output Wires at each Shelf in the
Rack. Terminate visual alarm output wires at the CRITVIS,
MAJVIS, MINVIS wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and at
the central office visual alarm panel, if not connected to a PDAP
(PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S).
Detail-level alarm cabling procedures are located in Chapter
■ Visual Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf,
page 4-17.
■ Visual Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf,
page 4-19.
5 Connect Audible Alarm Output Wires at each Shelf in
the Rack. Terminate audible alarm output wires at the
CRITAUD, MAJAUD, MINAUD wire-wrap posts on the main
backplane and to the central office audible alarm panel.
Detail-level alarm cabling procedures are located in Chapter
■ Audible Alarm Output Connections at the First Shelf,
page 4-21.
■ Audible Alarm Output Connections at the Next Shelf,
page 4-23.
6 Connect Remote Visual and Audible Alarm Output
Wires at each Shelf in the Rack. Terminate remote visual
and audible alarm output wires at the REMVIS and REMAUD
wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the central office
remote alarm cross-connect panel.
The location of these wire-wrap posts on the main backplane are
provided in Chapter 1—“Traverse System Alarm Interface,”
Remote Visual and Remote Audible Alarm Output
Connections, page 4-25.
7 Connect Environmental Alarm Input Wires at each Shelf
in the Rack. Terminate environmental alarm input wires at the
ENV IN and RTN wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and at
the equipment being monitored.
Environmental Alarm Input Connections, page 4-27

Cabling Checklist (continued)

8 Connect Visual or Audible Fail-safe Alarm Wires at each
Shelf in the Rack. Terminate fail-safe alarm wires at the
FAILSAFE wire-wrap posts on the main backplane and the
central office visual or audible alarm panel.
Fail-safe Alarm, page 4-28.
9 Attach clamp-on ferrites around alarm cable bundles.
Two ferrites around the cable bundle, one 6-inches from the rack,
the other 12 to 18-inches from the rack.
10 All Power, Fuse, Visual, Audible, Environmental and Fail-safe
Alarm Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist
Timing, Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection are provided in Volume 2,
Ethernet and Installation and Configuration, Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter
RS-232 Cabling 1—“Precautions.” Basic procedures for cable routing are provided in Section 1—Basic
Checklist Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 3—“Cable Routing.”
All timing, Ethernet and RS-232 cabling detail-level procedure references are to
Volume 2, Installation and Configuration, Section 4—Traverse System Alarm, Timing
and Ethernet Cabling. Required equipment and tools are also provided as part of each
cabling chapter.

making connections at the Traverse main backplane. Plug the ESD wrist
strap into the ESD jack provided on the air ramp or other confirmed source
of earth ground.
.
Table 7-6 Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist

1 Connect T1 or Composite Clock Timing Wires. Connect
input and output timing wires from the central office SASE T1 or
Composite Clock timing source to the Traverse main backplane
T1/E1 or CC2M wire-wrap posts.
Detail-level timing interface procedures are located in Chapter
2—“Traverse System Timing Interface”:
■ T1 Timing Interface Input, page 4-33.
■ T1 Timing Interface Output, page 4-35.
■ Composite Clock Timing Interface Input, page 4-37.
2 Verify Jumpers on Main Backplane Headers J2 and J3.

The location of these jumpers is provided in Chapter
2—“Traverse System Timing Interface,” Verify Jumpers on
Headers J2 and J3, page 4-40.
3 Connect DCN Ethernet Cabling. Connect DCN Ethernet
cabling from the LAN/WAN network device to the Traverse main
backplane J4 (ETHERNET) RJ-45 connector.
The detail-level DCN Ethernet interface connection procedure is
located in Chapter 3—“Traverse System DCN Ethernet and
RS-232 Interface,” DCN Ethernet Interface Connection,
page 4-44.
4 Attach clamp-on ferrite to Ethernet cable. One ferrite
(2 turns) on each cable 6-inches from the rack. A one half turn is
defined as a single pass through the ferrite hole.

Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist
Table 7-6 Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist (continued)

5 Connect RS-232 Interface Cabling. Connect RS-232
interface cabling from an external modem to the Traverse main
backplane J5 (RS-232) RJ-45 connector using an RJ-45 to DB-25
adaptor.
The detail-level RS-232 interface connection procedure is located
in Chapter 3—“Traverse System DCN Ethernet and RS-232
Interface,” DCN Ethernet Interface Connection, page 4-44.
6 All Timing, Ethernet and RS-232 Cabling Checklist steps are
complete.

Power Cabling Checklist
Power Cabling Basic precautions for electrostatic discharge protection and power cabling are provided
Checklist in Volume 2, Installation and Configuration, Section 1—Basic Precautions and
Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions.” Basic procedures for cable routing are provided
in Section 1—Basic Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 3—“Cable Routing.”
All power cabling detail-level procedure references are to Volume 2, Installation and
Configuration, Section 5—Power Cabling. Required equipment and tools are also
provided as part of each chapter.
WARNING! Use extreme caution when working with battery and

battery return supply cables. Remove all metal jewelry when working
with power circuits.

making connections at the PDAP-2S, PDAP-4S, and Traverse main
.
Table 7-7 Power Cabling Checklist

1 Connect Battery and Battery Return Distribution
Cabling. Connect battery and battery return distribution cabling
from the back of the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S to the Traverse main
backplane power terminals.
Detail-level battery distribution cabling procedures are located in
Chapter 1—“Battery and Battery Return Distribution”:
2 Connect Central Office Battery “A” and “B” Supply
Cabling. Connect central office battery “A” and “B” supply
cabling from the battery distribution fuse bay (BDFB)—or other
central office battery source—to PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S battery
supply terminal lugs.
WARNING! Ensure battery supply cables are not connected
to central office battery source before beginning this
procedure to avoid personal injury.
The detail-level battery supply cabling procedure is located in
Chapter 2—“Battery and Battery Return Supply,” Battery Supply
Cabling, page 5-19.

Table 7-7 Power Cabling Checklist (continued)

3 Connect Central Office Battery Return “A” and “B”
Supply Cabling. Connect central office battery return “A” and
“B” supply cabling from the battery return bus bar (or other
central office battery return source) to PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S
battery return supply terminal lugs.
The detail-level battery return supply cabling procedure is located
in Section 5—Power Cabling, Chapter 2—“Battery and Battery
Return Supply,” Battery Return Supply Cabling, page 5-22.
4 Attach clamp-on ferrites around Battery cables at the
rack. Two ferrites around A feed and two ferrites around B feed
(-48 and RTN) cables 6-inches from the rack.
5 Connect Battery and Battery Return Supply Cables to
the Central Office Source. Connect battery and battery return
supply cables to the central office source following local
procedures or arrange for a local central office technician to make
these connections.
WARNING! Complete continuity testing before connecting
battery and battery return cables to the central office source.
WARNING! Before connecting the supply cables, go to the
front of the PDAP and verify that all PDAP-2S circuit
breakers are in the OFF position or PDAP-4S TPA fuse
holders are empty. Also verify the GMT fuse positions are
empty or contain dummy fuses.
The detail-level supply cabling to the central office source
procedure is located in Chapter 2—“Battery and Battery Return
Supply,” Connect Supply Cables to the Central Office Source,
page 5-24.
6 Attach clamp-on ferrites around Battery cables at the
CO. At the battery filter, attach one clamp-on ferrite around A
feed and one ferrite around B feed (_in and _out) cables 6-inches
from the filter.

Table 7-7 Power Cabling Checklist (continued)

7 Verify Polarity and Voltage. Confirm polarity between the
battery and battery return supply connections at the PDAP-2S or
PDAP-4S. Measure the voltage present at the NEG VDC “A” and
“B” input lugs on the PDAP-2S or PDAP-4S.
Procedures are provided in Chapter 2—“Battery and Battery
Return Supply”:
■ Verify Polarity, page 5-25.
■ Verify Voltage, page 5-26.
WARNING! Verify that all PDAP-2S circuit breakers are in
the OFF position or PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders are empty
before verifying polarity or voltage.
8 All Power Cabling Checklist steps are complete.

Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist
Start-up and Basic precautions and procedures for handling modules and electrostatic discharge
Initial protection are provided in Volume 2, Installation and Configuration, Section 1—Basic
Configuration Precautions and Procedures, Chapter 1—“Precautions” and Chapter 4—“Inserting and
Checklist Removing Modules,” page 1-15.
All start-up and initial configuration detail-level procedure references are to Volume 2,
Installation and Configuration Section 6—Start-up and Module Placement. Required
equipment and tools are also provided as part of start-up and module placement
chapters.

handling and placing modules into the Traverse shelf. Plug the ESD wrist
strap into the ESD jack provided on the air ramp or other confirmed source
of earth ground.
WARNING! Follow all directions and warning labels when working

with optical fibers. Always wear eye protection when working with
optical fibers. Never look directly into the end of a terminated or
unterminated fiber or connector as it may cause eye damage.
Table 7-8 Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist

1 Switch on Power to the Traverse Shelves. Battery “A” and
“B” PDAP-2S circuit breakers and PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders
are located on the front of the PDAP. The PDAP-2S supports up to
two shelves (A1 and A2, B1 and B2), and the PDAP-4S supports
up to four shelves (A1–A4 and B1–B4). Switch the PDAP-2S
circuit breakers to the ON position or install an operable
PDAP-4S TPA fuse for each installed shelf beginning with A1
and B1. Leave the other PDAP-2S circuit breakers in the OFF
position or PDAP-4S TPA fuse holders empty.
Important: The input power and critical alarm LEDs display on
the PDAP indicating no modules are place in the Traverse shelf.
The fan tray holder power LED is green.
Refer to Chapter 1—“Start-up and Initial Configuration,” Power
up the Traverse Shelf, page 6-9.
2 Place the Active GCM in Slot GCMA or GCMB.
Important: The GCM power LED is steady on “green”
indicating that the GCM has power. The steady on “green”
Active/Standby LEd indicates that it is the active GCM module.
Initial configuration is done through the active GCM via the CLI.

Table 7-8 Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist (continued)

3 Connect your Laptop to the Active GCM RS-232
Interface. Connect your laptop to the active GCM RS-232
interface (DB-9) connector using a standard straight-through
serial port cable. Open up VT100 emulation software on your
laptop and create your terminal emulation session.
The detail-level initial configuration procedure for the following
steps is provided in Chapter 1—“Start-up and Initial
Configuration,” Traverse Node Initial Configuration,
page 6-11.
4 Logon to the TransNav Management System Command
Line Interface (CLI). Enter a login (admin) and password
(admin) to access the node for initial configuration.
5 Establish Node Name and Node IP Address. Use the
exec node commission command to establish the node
name (node-id) and node IP address (node-ip) for the
Traverse node.
Note: IP addresses required for the initial node configuration are
provided in Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration
Information, page 6-5.
6 Restart the Node. Use the exec node restart command
to set the IP addresses and to make the node operational.
7 Establish backplane DCN Ethernet, EMS, NTP, and GCM
IP Addresses. Use the set node ip command to establish
the following ip addresses:
■ Backplane DCN Ethernet interface IP address
(bp-dcn-ip), Backplane DCN mask (bp-dcn-mask),
backplane DCN gateway IP (bp-dcn-gw-ip).
■ EMS IP address (ems-ip), EMS mask (ems-mask) and
EMS gateway (ems-gw).
■ Primary and secondary NTP server IP address
(ntp-ip-address1) and (ntp-ip-address2).
■ GCMA and GCMB IP addresses (gcm-a-ip) and
(gcm-b-ip) for the Traverse node.
Note: IP addresses required for the initial node configuration are
provided in Table 6-1 Required Node Initial Configuration
Information, page 6-5.
8 Establish Node Location and Time Zone Locale. Use the
set node general command to establish node location name
(location) and (locale).

Table 7-8 Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist (continued)

9 Identify the PDAP-2S type of PDAP. Use the set node
env pdap-type type2<Enter> command to identify the
PDAP-2S (type2) type.
10 Restart the Node. Use the exec node restart command
to set the IP addresses.
11 Change the Admin Password. For node security use the
exec user change-password command to change the
admin password after initial node configuration is complete.
12 Exit the CLI. Exit your terminal emulation session.
13 Place the Standby GCM in the Remaining GCM slot.
Important: The Active/Standby LED on the standby GCM
flashes amber while it is synchronizing with the active GCM.
Important: Wait for synchronization to complete. The
Active/Standby LED flashes green indicating that it is the standby
GCM and that synchronization is complete.
14 Place the Remaining Modules. Plan module placement for
the Traverse shelf based on completed network interface cabling
and module placement recommendations provided in Appendix
A—“Module Placement Planning and Guidelines,” page 7-1. Also
refer to the following procedures for detailed instructions:
■ Chapter 2—“Module Placement,” Module Placement
Guidelines, page 6-30.
■ Chapter 2—“Module Placement,” Clean Fiber Optic MPX
Connectors, page 6-34 if you are placing optical modules.
■ Chapter 2—“Module Placement,” Insert Module, page 6-38.
15 Place 1-slot Wide Blank Faceplates. Place 1-slot wide blank
faceplates in any empty Traverse card cage slots to ensure EMI
protection and proper cooling.
16 All Start-up and Initial Configuration Checklist steps are
complete.


SECTION 7APPENDICES
Appendix C
TransAccess Figure 7-1 diagrams an Ethernet network with TransAccess 100 Muxes connected to a
100 Mux data communications network (DCN) for remote management via the TransNav
Network Management System.
Diagram Subnet
Node
Mux
STS-1
Hub Mux
STS-1 STS-1
Network
Mux
STS-1
Server
Network Operations Center (NOC)

Management Management
System Server System Client
IP Network
Workstation Workstation
Gateway
Management
Workstation Management
Workstation
System Client System Client
Figure 7-1 TransAccess 100 Muxes Connected to an Ethernet Network


SECTION 7APPENDICES
Appendix D
GCM Ethernet and RS-232 Pinouts
GCM Ethernet GCM Ethernet and RS-232 interfaces are located on the GCM faceplate. The following
and RS-232 tables provide pinouts for these interfaces.
Interface
Pinouts Table 7-9 GCM Ethernet (RJ-45) Pinouts
10/100BaseT Ethernet
RJ-45 Connector Pin Wire Color Description
1 Grey ETH_TX+
2 Brown ETH_TX-
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
3 Yellow ETH_RX+
4 Green NC
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
5 Red NC
6 Black ETH_RX-
7 Orange NC
8 Blue NC

GCM Ethernet and RS-232 Interface Pinouts
Table 7-10 GCM RS-232 (DB-9) Pinouts
RS-232
DB-9 Connector Pin Description
1 NC
2 TXD
3 RXD
5 4 3 2 1
4 NC
9 8 7 6 5 SGND
6 NC
7 NC
8 NC
9 NC

I NDEX
Numerics Battery return

distribution cabling (PDAP-2S), 5-7
1:1 equipment protection
distribution cabling (PDAP-4S), 5-13
ECMs, 3-19
supply cabling, 5-22
module placement, 3-3
1:2 equipment protection
C
ECMs, 3-19
10⁄100BaseT Cable
backplane DCN Ethernet interface, 6-2 routing, 1-11
cabling, 3-42 Cabling
ECM Telco 50 connector pinouts (16-port combo), 10⁄100BaseT ECM, 3-42
3-47 10⁄100BaseTX, 3-37
ECM Telco 50 connector pinouts (24-port), 3-45 alarm checklist, 7-11
electrical connector module, 3-38 battery distribution (PDAP-2S), 5-4
electrical connector placement, 3-36 battery distribution (PDAP-4S), 5-9
10⁄100BaseTX battery return distribution (PDAP-2S), 5-7
unprotected cabling, 3-37 battery return distribution (PDAP-4S), 5-13
battery return supply, 5-22
A battery supply cabling, 5-19
DS1, 3-16
Alarm
DS1 ECM, 3-13
audible output connections, 4-21, 4-23
DS1 options, 3-8
environmental alarm connections, 4-27
DS3, 3-34
environmental alarm input wire-wrap posts, 4-5
DS3 ECM, 3-30
fail-safe and ACO wire-wrap posts, 4-4
fiber optic, 3-60
fail-safe connections, 4-28
network checklist, 7-9
fuse alarm connections, 4-12
power checklist, 7-16
fuse alarm connections (PDAP-4S), 4-15
timing, Ethernet, RS-232 checklist, 7-14
PDAP-2S visual input connections, 4-13
Traverse alarm interface, 4-1
PDAP-4S visual input connections, 4-16
Cards, see Modules
power alarm connections, 4-14
Central office power supply, 5-24
remote visual and audible output connections, 4-25
Checklists
system alarm wire-wrap posts, 4-3
alarm cabling, 7-11
Traverse cabling interface, 4-1
hardware installation, 7-8
visual output connections, 4-17, 4-19
network cabling, 7-9
power cabling, 7-16
B
start-up and initial configuration, 7-19
Back covers, see Traverse shelf and PDAP timing, Ethernet, RS-232 cabling, 7-14
Backplane CLI
data communications network, 6-2 command descriptions, 6-10
DCN Ethernet interface, 6-2 commands for initial configuration, 6-12
environmental alarm module, 4-1 Composite clock timing, see Timing
TBOS interface, 4-1 Configuration
Traverse 1600 fiber optic, 3-58 CLI commands, 6-12
Traverse 2000 fiber optic, 3-59 node, 6-11
Battery shelf, 6-11
distribution cabling (PDAP-2S), 5-4 Connections
distribution cabling (PDAP-4S), 5-9 audible alarm output, 4-21
supply cabling, 5-19 audible alarm relay output, 4-23
Release 1.4 Turin Networks Index-1

Index
Connections (continued) Electrical connector modules (ECM)

environmental alarm input, 4-27 1:1 equipment protection, 3-19
fail-safe alarm output, 4-28 1:2 equipment protection, 3-19
fuse alarm, 4-12 10⁄100BaseT pinouts, 3-38
fuse alarm (PDAP-4S), 4-15 descriptions, 3-1
PDAP-2S visual alarm relay input, 4-13 DS1, 3-6
PDAP-4S visual alarm relay input, 4-16 DS3/E3, 3-20
power alarm, 4-14 placement, 3-2
remote visual and audible alarm output, 4-25 placement planning guidelines, 3-3
visual alarm output, 4-17, 4-19 Telco 50 connector pinouts (16-port combo), 3-47
Connectors, see MPX connectors Telco 50 connector pinouts (24-port), 3-45
Control plane Telco 64 connector pinouts, 3-17
communication with DCC, 6-2 types, 3-4
domain definition, 6-2 Electrical precautions, 1-2
Control Plane, see Intelligent Control Plane Electrostatic discharge, see ESD
Environmental
D alarm input wire-wrap posts, 4-5
alarm module, 4-1, 4-5
Data communications network (DCN)
alarms, 4-1
backplane DCN Ethernet interface, 6-2
precautions, 1-1
connectivity, 6-2
ESD
description, 6-2
jack location, 1-5
DCN
precautions, 1-5
Ethernet interface, 4-41, 6-2
Ethernet interface, see DCN Ethernet interface
Ethernet interface connection, 4-44
Ethernet interface pinouts, 4-42
see Data communications network (DCN)
F
DCN Ethernet interface Fail-safe and ACO wire-wrap posts, 4-4
DS1 Fan tray
cabling options, 3-8 module installation, 2-18
ECM, 3-6 Fan tray holder
ECM cabling, 3-13 front inlet, 23-inch rack adaptation installation, 2-15
ECM Telco 64 connector pinouts, 3-17 front inlet, power cabling, 2-15
electrical connector placement, 3-6 Fiber optic
module LEDs, 6-23 assignment, 3-54
panel cabling, 3-16 cable management tray, 3-62
timing, see Timing cabling, 1-18, 3-60, 6-36
DS1 timing, see Timing clean MPX connectors, 1-16
DS3 cleaning MPX connectors, 6-34
16-slot shelf cabling schemes, 3-23 color code, 3-54
20-slot shelf cabling schemes, 3-24 color code 1-port modules, 3-54
cabling, 3-30 color code 4-port modules, 3-55
max. port per shelf, 6-27 color code 8-port modules, 3-56
module LEDs, 6-23 color code GbE plus 10⁄100BaseTX Combo
panel cabling, 3-34 modules, 3-55
DS3 TMUX color code GbE plus 100BaseFX Combo modules,
max. port per shelf, 6-27 3-57
DS3/E3 connectors, see MPX connectors
electrical connector module placement, 3-20 patch panel, 3-59
testing, 3-64
E Traverse 1600 backplane, 3-58
Traverse 2000 backplane, 3-59
ECM
Front inlet fan module
see Electrical connector modules (ECM)
LED indicators, 6-17
Index-2 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Index
Front inlet fan tray holder LEDs (continued)

19-inch rack installation, 2-12 front inlet fan module, 6-17
23-inch rack installation, 2-12 GbE module LEDs, 6-24
air filter installation, 2-19 GCM alarm, 6-22
power cabling, 2-12 OC-N modules, 6-24
Fuse and visual alarm power and standby all modules, 6-21
PDAP-2S wire-wrap posts, 4-8 Traverse modules, 6-19
VT Switch module, 6-23
G Line cards, see Modules
Gateway node, 6-2
see Management gateway node
M
GbE Management domain
module LEDs, 6-24 definition, 6-2
GbE plus 10⁄100BaseTX Management gateway node (MGN)
max. port per shelf, 6-27 connectivity, 6-2
GbE plus 100BaseFX definition, 6-2
max. port per shelf, 6-27 Management System
GCM OSPF, 6-2
alarm LEDs, 6-22 MGN
Ethernet interface pinouts, 7-25 see Management gateway node (MGN)
max. per shelf, 6-25 Module placement
RS-232 interface pinouts, 7-25 1:1 equipment protection, 3-3
Grounding and planning guidelines, 7-1
front inlet fan tray holder, 2-10 guidelines, 6-30
PDAP, 2-4 unprotected, 3-3
PDAP and the Traverse shelf, 5-15 Modules
Traverse shelf, 2-10 descriptions, 6-25
DS1, 6-27
H DS3, 6-27
DS3 TMUX, 6-27
Hardware installation checklist, 7-8
GbE plus 10⁄100BaseTX Combo, 6-27
Hardware precautions, 1-2
GbE plus 100BaseFX Combo, 6-27
I GCM, 6-25
insert, 1-20, 6-38
Initial configuration of a node, 6-11 insert and remove, 1-15
Initial configuration of a Traverse node, 6-1 maximum number per shelf, 6-25
Installation maximum ports per shelf, 6-25
fan tray module, 2-18 OC-12, 6-28
front inlet fan tray air filter, 2-19 OC-192, 6-29
front inlet fan tray holder, 19-inch rack, 2-12 OC-3, 6-28
front inlet fan tray holder, 23-inch rack, 2-12 OC-48, 6-28
front inlet fan tray holder, 23-inch rack adaptation, power and standby LEDs, 6-21
2-15 remove, 1-24
hardware checklist, 7-8 VT Switch, 6-26
shelf, 19-inch rack, 2-10 MPX connectors
shelf, 23-inch rack, 2-10 cleaning, 1-16, 6-34
shelf, 23-inch rack adaptation, 2-13 fiber position, 3-51
inspection, 1-16, 6-34
L mapping, 3-52
LEDs
DS1, 6-23 N
DS3, 6-23 Node initial configuration, 6-11

Index
O Procedures (continued)
battery return distribution cabling (PDAP-4S), 5-13
OC-12
battery return supply cabling, 5-22
max. port per shelf, 6-28
battery supply cabling, 5-19
OC-192
clean fiber optic MPX connectors, 1-16
CO audible alarm outputs, 4-21
OC-3
CO audible alarm relay outputs, 4-23
CO remote visual and audible alarm outputs, 4-25
OC-48
CO visual alarm outputs, 4-17, 4-19
composite clock timing interface input, 4-37
OC-N module LEDs, 6-24
connect supply cables to CO source, 5-24
OSPF, 6-2
DCN Ethernet interface connection, 4-44
DS1 panel cabling, 3-16
P
DS1cabling at the ECM, 3-13
PDAP, 2-1, 5-18 DS3 cabling at the ECM, 3-30
19-inch rack installation, 2-5 DS3 panel cabling, 3-34
23-inch rack installation, 2-6 environmental alarm inputs, 4-27
back view, 5-2 fail-safe alarm outputs, 4-28
grounding, 2-4 fan tray module installation, 2-18
remove protective back cover, 1-10 fiber optic cabling, 3-60
replace protective back cover, 1-10 front inlet fan tray air filter installation, 2-19
PDAP-2S front inlet fan tray holder power cabling, 2-12, 2-15
back view, 5-2 front inlet fan tray holder, 19-inch rack installation,
fuse and visual alarm wire-wrap posts, 4-8 2-12
PDAP-4S front inlet fan tray holder, 23-inch rack adaptation
back view, 5-2 installation, 2-15
power, fuse and visual alarm wire-wrap posts, 4-10 front inlet fan tray holder, 23-inch rack installation,
Pinouts 2-12
10⁄100BaseT ECM, 3-38, 3-45 fuse alarm connections, 4-12
DCN Ethernet, 4-42 fuse alarm connections (PDAP-4S), 4-15
DS1 ECM, 3-17 insert modules, 1-20
GCM Ethernet interface, 7-25 PDAP 19-inch rack installation, 2-5
GCM RS-232 interface, 7-25 PDAP 23-inch rack installation, 2-6
RS-232, 4-42 PDAP protective back cover, 1-10
Polarity, verify, 5-25 PDAP-2S CO visual alarm relay inputs, 4-13
Power cabling PDAP-4S CO visual alarm relay inputs, 4-16
front inlet fan tray holder procedure, 2-12, 2-15 power alarm connections, 4-14
Power Distribution and Alarm Panel, see PDAP remove modules, 1-24
Power supply, 5-24 remove PDAP protective back cover, 1-10
Power up the Traverse shelf, 6-9 remove Traverse back covers, 1-9
Power, fuse and visual alarm RS-232 interface connection, 4-46
PDAP-4S wire-wrap posts, 4-10 shelf, 19-inch rack installation, 2-10
Precaution statements shelf, 23-inch rack adaptation installation, 2-13
electrical, 1-2 shelf, 23-inch rack installation, 2-10
electrostatic discharge (ESD), 1-5 T1 timing interface output, 4-35
environmental, 1-1 verify polarity, 5-25
hardware, 1-2 verify voltage, 5-26
module placement, 1-4
Procedures R
10⁄100BaseT cabling at the ECM, 3-42
RJ-45 connector
battery distribution cabling (PDAP-2S), 5-4
backplane Ethernet interface, 6-2
battery distribution cabling (PDAP-4S), 5-9
battery return distribution cabling (PDAP-2S), 5-7
Index-4 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Index
RS-232 interface Traverse shelf

connection, 4-46 back covers, removing and replacing, 1-7
DB-25 pinouts, 4-43 cable ports left side, 1-11
DB-9 pinouts, 4-43 cable routing left side, 1-12
pinouts, 4-42 diagrams, 2-9
Traverse DB-25 pinouts, 4-47 removing back covers, 1-9
Traverse DB-9 pinouts, 4-47 start-up and initial configuration, 6-1
timing interface wire-wrap posts, 4-32
S Traverse system
alarm interface, 4-1
Shelf
configuration, 2-2, 2-8
19-inch rack installation, 2-10
management gateway node (MGN), 4-41
23-inch rack adaptation installation, 2-13
module LEDs, 6-19
23-inch rack installation, 2-10
initial configuration, 6-11
Start-up, 6-1, 6-9
V
initial configuration checklist, 7-19 Verify
visual status during, 6-20 polarity, 5-25
System alarm wire-wrap posts, 4-3 voltage, 5-26
Visual status during start-up, 6-20
T Voltage, verify, 5-26
VT Switch
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS) protocol
max. per shelf, 6-26
interface, 4-1
module LEDs, 6-23
Timing
composite clock input connections, 4-37
interface, see Timing
W
T1 input connections, 4-33 Warning statements, see Precaution statements
T1 output connections, 4-35 Wire-wrap posts
Traverse interface wire-wrap posts, 4-32 Traverse timing interface, 4-32
Traverse primary and secondary I/O, 4-29
TransAccess 100 Mux
installation documentation, 2-2, 2-8
TransAccess 100 network diagram, 7-23

Volume 2 - Installation and Configuration Release 1.4 Rev A

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Volume 2 - Installation and Configuration Release 1.4 Rev A

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Turin Networks Inc.

Section 1 Basic Precautions and Procedures

Section 2 Hardware Installation

Section 3 Network Interface Cabling

Section 4 Traverse System Alarm, Timing and Ethernet Cabling

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page i

Section 5 Power Cabling

Section 6 Start-up and Module Placement

Page ii Turin Networks Release 1.4

Introduction This description contains the following documentation topics:

Release Feature Volume Reference

1:2 equipment protection and/or Section 3—Network Interface Cabling:

12-port DS3/EC-1/E3 module, ■ Section 7—Appendices, Appendix A—“Module Placement

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page iii

Volume Description Target Audience

Page iv Turin Networks Release 1.4

Information Traverse system documentation uses Information Mapping format. Information

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page v

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page vii

Page viii Turin Networks Release 1.4

WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not

WARNING! May cause personal injury if the warning is not followed;

Important: May cause equipment damage if the precaution is not

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-1

Important: To ensure proper air flow, 3/8-inch of space is required

Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

Page 1-2 Turin Networks Release 1.4

WARNING! The optical connector system used on the Traverse fiber

WARNING! Follow all warning labels when working with optical

Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

Important: To prevent possible damage to the fiber optic cables, do not

Important: Always use a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-3

Important: Do not install Traverse modules (cards) until all installation

Important: Handle modules by the edges and faceplate only. Do not

Important: Observe all electrostatic sensitive device warnings and

Important: To ensure EMI protection and proper cooling, place one-slot

Page 1-4 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Electrostatic To avoid damage to Traverse integrated circuits, a properly grounded Electrostatic

Figure 1-1 Front Inlet Fan Module ESD Jack Location

Figure 1-2 Air Ramp with ESD Jack Locations

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-5

Page 1-6 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-7

Alarm and Timing

Protruding Cover over

Important: Always wear a properly grounded Electrostatic Discharge

Page 1-8 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Figure 1-4 Fiber Optic Management Tray Cover with Fasteners

2 Pull the cover straight back to remove.

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-9

Table 1-2 Remove the PDAP Protective Back Cover

Page 1-10 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-11

DCN Ethernet and Battery Return "A" and "B"

Page 1-12 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-13

Fiber optic cable is

Fiber optic cable is

Figure 1-7 Fiber Cable Management Tray

Page 1-14 Turin Networks Release 1.4

Release 1.4 Turin Networks Page 1-15

WARNING! The Traverse system is a class 1 product that contains a